WO2021187108A1 - Vehicle automatic driving device - Google Patents
Vehicle automatic driving device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2021187108A1 WO2021187108A1 PCT/JP2021/008157 JP2021008157W WO2021187108A1 WO 2021187108 A1 WO2021187108 A1 WO 2021187108A1 JP 2021008157 W JP2021008157 W JP 2021008157W WO 2021187108 A1 WO2021187108 A1 WO 2021187108A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- actuator
- pedal
- vehicle
- frame
- pedal actuator
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01M—TESTING STATIC OR DYNAMIC BALANCE OF MACHINES OR STRUCTURES; TESTING OF STRUCTURES OR APPARATUS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- G01M17/00—Testing of vehicles
- G01M17/007—Wheeled or endless-tracked vehicles
Definitions
- the present invention relates to an automatic vehicle driving device.
- a vehicle automatic driving device that performs pedal operation and shift lever operation of the vehicle on behalf of the driver is generally used.
- Patent Document 1 discloses a vehicle automatic driving device in which a pedal of a vehicle is pressed by a pedal actuator.
- the vehicle automatic driving device of Patent Document 1 adjusts the position of the pedal actuator with respect to the pedal of the vehicle such as the accelerator pedal.
- the vehicle automatic driving device of the present invention includes a frame mounted on the driver's seat of the vehicle, a pedal actuator detachably attached to the front end portion of the frame, and a light provided on the front end portion of the frame so as to illuminate the front.
- a secondary battery that is a power source for the light is built in the frame, and is charged while connected to an external power source.
- the light is composed of an LED light.
- the secondary battery is a capacitor.
- a plurality of the pedal actuators are provided, and the lights are provided in each of the portions of the frame to which the pedal actuators are attached.
- the light is arranged diagonally downward on the lower surface of the front end of the frame.
- connection box is provided at the front of the frame to form a connection with a cable that is pulled into the vehicle from the outside of the vehicle, and a switch for the light is arranged on the upper surface of the connection box.
- the vehicle automatic driving device of the present invention has a light that illuminates the front of the front end portion of the frame, by turning on the light, the work of installing the vehicle automatic driving device such as when adjusting the position of the pedal actuator is performed.
- the sex can be improved.
- the perspective view of the vehicle automatic driving apparatus which showed the transmission actuator unit and the accelerator pedal actuator in the disassembled state.
- FIG. 1 A perspective view showing the frame mounted on the driver's seat.
- Perspective view of the movable unit A perspective view of the movable unit as viewed from below.
- a side view of a partial cross section showing the movable unit and the transmission actuator unit in an exploded manner.
- a side view of a partial cross section showing a state in which the movable unit and the transmission actuator unit are assembled.
- Perspective view of the transmission actuator unit Perspective view of the transmission actuator unit seen from different directions.
- An exploded perspective view of the transmission actuator unit An exploded perspective view of the transmission actuator unit seen from below.
- FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a main part of a transmission actuator unit showing a stopper mechanism. Sectional drawing of the main part of a transmission actuator unit along a plane orthogonal to a stopper pin.
- Perspective view of the pedal actuator support bracket Perspective view of the pedal actuator support bracket.
- FIG. 1 to 4 show a state in which the vehicle automatic driving device 1 according to the present invention is mounted on the driver's seat 2 of the vehicle.
- 5 to 9 show the entire vehicle automatic driving device 1 in a state of being removed from the vehicle.
- This vehicle automatic driving device 1 is used when a running test of a vehicle is performed on a chassis dynamometer (not shown), and a pedal operation such as an accelerator pedal and a transmission of a transmission are performed by a signal from a control device arranged outside the vehicle. Operate the shift lever.
- the vehicle automatic driving device 1 of the present embodiment can be used regardless of whether the vehicle is a manual transmission type vehicle having a clutch pedal or an automatic transmission type vehicle not provided with the clutch pedal, as will be described later. It is possible, and it is applicable to both so-called right-hand drive vehicles with the driver's seat on the right side of the vehicle and the shift lever is operated with the left hand, and so-called left-handle vehicles with the driver's seat on the left side of the vehicle and the shift lever is operated with the right hand. Is possible.
- the embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 9 is a configuration example in which the vehicle is a manual transmission type vehicle including an accelerator pedal 45, a brake pedal 46, and a clutch pedal 47, and is applied to a right-hand steering wheel vehicle. The vehicle automatic driving device 1 of the above is shown.
- the driver's seat 2 is supported on the vehicle body floor 6 (see FIG. 2) via a front-rear slide mechanism and a vertical lift mechanism (not shown), and includes a seat cushion 3 constituting a seat surface on which the driver sits. It includes a seat back 4 that supports the driver's back and a headrest 5 that supports the driver's head. In general, the seat back 4 is provided with a so-called reclining mechanism capable of adjusting the inclination angle with respect to the seat cushion 3.
- the vehicle automatic driving device 1 includes a frame 11 extending diagonally downward from the vicinity of the upper end portion of the seat back 4 toward the front of the vehicle, and a pair of leg portions 12 extending downward along the front end of the seat cushion 3 at the front end of the frame 11. , Three pedal actuators 41 extending from the front end of the frame 11 to the front of the vehicle to operate the three pedals 45, 46, 47, respectively, and being supported in a state of being lifted from the seat cushion 3 and the seat back 4 in the middle portion of the frame 11. It is roughly composed of a movable unit 101, a transmission actuator unit 131 mounted on the upper surface of the movable unit 101, and a connection box 106 located at the front end of the frame 11.
- the pedal actuator 41 includes an accelerator pedal actuator 41A for operating the accelerator pedal 45, a brake pedal actuator 41B for operating the brake pedal 46, and a clutch pedal actuator 41C for operating the clutch pedal 47 (). 5 and 31).
- These three pedal actuators 41 may have completely the same configuration, but in this embodiment, the clutch pedal 47 operates in an arc and the stroke (stepping operation amount) is relatively large.
- the clutch pedal actuator 41C has a configuration different from that of the other two pedal actuators 41A and 41B in detail.
- the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B have substantially the same configuration. Since the basic configuration is common to the three pedal actuators 41, they are collectively referred to as the pedal actuator 41 when it is not necessary to distinguish them.
- connection box 106 provides a connection portion between various actuators and sensors included in the vehicle automatic driving device 1 and a cable (including a power supply system and a signal system) (not shown) drawn into the vehicle from a control device outside the vehicle. It is configured.
- the movable unit 101 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the frame 11, and functions as a support base for the transmission actuator unit 131.
- the movable unit 101 and the connection box 106 are electrically connected to each other via a flexible flat band-shaped cable 100.
- the cable 100 has a configuration in which a plurality of electric wires are protected by a flexible protective member similar to a metal chain, and by bending in a U-shape or a J-shape, both of them are formed regardless of the slide position of the movable unit 101. Connection is possible.
- the transmission actuator unit 131 operates a shift lever located on the left hand side of the driver's seat 2, and has a select actuator 133 that operates the shift lever along the vehicle width direction (so-called select operation) and a shift.
- the structure is a combination of a shift actuator 134 that operates the lever along the front-rear direction of the vehicle (so-called shift operation).
- the transmission actuator unit 131 includes a grip hand 168 for gripping, for example, a substantially spherical knob or grip of a shift lever head (not shown), and the grip hand 168 moves forward and backward by the operation of the shift actuator 134.
- the entire shift actuator 134 moves along the vehicle width direction by the operation of the select actuator 133, thereby realizing both the select operation and the shift operation.
- the vehicle automatic driving device 1 mounted on the driver's seat 2 of the vehicle is fixed to the vehicle by pulling it diagonally backward and downward via the belt 25 on both the left and right sides of the driver's seat 2.
- a rigid seat support 27 is arranged at the rear end of the seat cushion 3, and belts 25 are hung on both ends of the ring portion 29 having an elongated shape on the left and right.
- the seat support 27 includes a plate portion 28 extending in a substantially L shape from the rear end of the seat cushion 3 to the lower end of the seat back 4, and the lower surface of the driver's seat 2 is provided from the rear of the driver's seat 2 (that is, the rear seat side of the vehicle).
- the plate portion 28 is attached so as to be inserted along the above (see FIG. 2).
- the belt 25 is configured in a loop shape on each of the left and right sides via a general-purpose belt tightener (so-called load tightener) (not shown), and the tightening operation is performed by the belt tightener.
- load tightener a general-purpose belt tightener
- the lower end of the leg portion 12 abuts on the vehicle body floor 6, and the upper end of the frame 11 abuts on the upper portion of the seat back 4.
- the frame 11 is formed in a hollow tubular shape using, for example, carbon fiber reinforced plastic (CFRP), and includes a main frame 15 and a subframe 16, both of which are integrally formed. More specifically, it is divided into several parts and molded and joined to each other to be integrated.
- CFRP carbon fiber reinforced plastic
- the main frame 15 has a substantially U shape in a plan view (meaning a state viewed from above the vehicle as shown in FIG. 5). That is, the main frame 15 includes a pair of main beams 15a extending diagonally in the front-rear direction of the vehicle, and a horizontal beam 15b along the horizontal direction extending vertically to connect the upper ends of the pair of main beams 15a to each other. Has. In the vehicle-mounted state, the lateral beam 15b abuts on the upper portion of the seat back 4, and the main beam 15a extends diagonally downward and linearly toward the front end of the seat cushion 3.
- the main beam 15a has a rectangular cross section, and the vertical dimension is relatively small at the central portion in the longitudinal direction (vehicle front-rear direction), extends in the vertical direction at the rear end portion, and is continuous with the lateral beam 15b without a step. ..
- the vertical dimension is slightly larger than the central portion at the front end to which the leg 12 is attached.
- the widthwise dimension of the rectangular cross section is generally constant in the range from the rear end to the center. Then, the widthwise dimension of the rectangular cross section gradually expands from the central portion to the front end portion. At the front end to which the leg 12 is attached, the dimension in the width direction of the rectangular cross section is sufficiently larger than the projected area of the leg 12 so as to form the attachment portion of the leg 12, and the sub They project inward to each other so as to be continuous with the frame 16.
- the pair of main beams 15a have symmetrical shapes.
- each main beam 15a is curved in an arch shape so as to form a barrel shape as a whole.
- the distance between the pair of main beams 15a is large near the center in the front-rear direction of the vehicle, and the distance between the rear end (lateral beam 15b) and the front end is smaller than that at the center. It has become.
- the main beam 15a is not a perfect straight line, but is gently curved in an arch shape so as to be relatively close to the shape formed by the seat back 4 and the seat cushion 3 (see FIG. 11).
- a belt loop 26 through which a belt-shaped belt 25 passes is attached to the upper surface of the central portion of the pair of main beams 15a.
- the belt loop 26 is made of a flat U-shaped metal member, and the belt 25 is attached to the main beam 15a through a gap formed between the belt loop 26 and the surface of the main beam 15a.
- the central portion where the belt loop 26 is located is the thinnest (the peripheral length of the main beam 15a is short), and the distance between the pair of main beams 15a is the widest.
- the belt 25 extending from the seat support 27 in the vehicle mounted state is the seat cushion 3 and the like, as shown in FIG. It will be arranged relatively straight (that is, without tilting in the front-rear direction of the vehicle) without interfering with the vehicle. Therefore, the belt 25 does not bite into the side edges of the seat cushion 3 and the seat back 4, and damage to the seat cushion 3 and the seat back 4 is suppressed.
- a plurality of belt loops 26 are arranged side by side in series so that the mounting position of the belt 25 can be adjusted.
- the lateral beam 15b of the main frame 15 has a substantially rectangular plate shape slightly inclined along the basic inclination angle of the seat back 4, and abuts near the upper end of the seat back 4 when mounted on a vehicle. It constitutes the seat back contact portion.
- the substantially rectangular outer surface of the lateral beam 15b comes into wide surface contact with the seat back 4.
- rubber portions 30 made of an elastomer having appropriate elasticity are respectively. It is provided.
- both shoulders, which are the rear ends of the frame 11, are strongly pressed against the seat back 4, but this portion is elastic.
- the rubber portion 30 has the above, damage to the seat back 4 is suppressed. Further, the rubber portion 30 also functions as a non-slip for the skin of the seat back 4.
- the rubber portion 30 can be attached at the same time, for example, at the time of final molding of the frame 11, but it may be attached in a later step.
- the seat back 4 generally has an upper pad portion 4a and a lower pad portion 4b whose internal materials (and thus hardness) are different from each other, but the seat back 4 is laterally substantially along the seam 4c of the epidermis which is the boundary between the two.
- the basic dimensions of each part of the main frame 15 are set so that the lower edge of the beam 15b (that is, the lower edge of the seat back contact portion) is located (see FIG. 12).
- the specific configuration of the seat back 4 differs depending on the vehicle type, but in many cases, the position of the boundary between the upper pad portion 4a and the lower pad portion 4b is substantially constant.
- the vehicle automatic driving device 1 can be easily positioned and the frame 11 can be positioned.
- the posture is stable. It should be noted that, depending on the vehicle type, it is of course possible to mount the vehicle automatic driving device 1 regardless of the position of such a seam 4c.
- the subframe 16 is located inside the main frame 15 that swells in a barrel shape as described above.
- the subframe 16 has a substantially U-shape as a whole in a plan view, and a pair of linear subbeams 16a located parallel to each other and a hollow plate-shaped lateral beam connecting the lower ends of the pair of subbeams 16a to each other. It has a connection box support portion 16b that extends forward in a bent shape from the lower end of the lateral beam 16b.
- the pair of sub-beams 16a and lateral beams 16b extend along one inclined plane corresponding to the inclination of the main frame 15.
- a pair of sub-beams 16a and lateral beams 16b are formed as if a U-shaped notch was cut out from an inclined strip-shaped or elongated rectangular base material.
- Each of the subbeams 16a has a rectangular cross section close to a square.
- the connection box support portion 16c is formed so as to be along a horizontal plane in a vehicle-mounted state. Therefore, the sub-beam 16a and the lateral beam 16b and the connection box support portion 16c are continuous with a predetermined angle.
- connection box support portion 16c arranged along the horizontal plane is located between the front ends of the pair of main beams 15a of the main frame 15 and is integrated with each other. That is, the main frame 15 having a substantially U shape in a plan view is configured to have a closed structure via the connection box support portion 16c. Further, the rear end (that is, the upper end) of the sub beam 16a is connected to the inner side surface of the lower edge of the lateral beam 15b of the main frame 15. As described above, the main frame 15 and the subframe 16 are integrated as a molded product using, for example, carbon fiber reinforced plastic (CFRP).
- CFRP carbon fiber reinforced plastic
- the overall inclination of the subframe 16 and the overall inclination of the main frame 15 almost correspond to each other.
- the main beam 15a is gently curved, the sub beam 16a extends linearly.
- the subframe 16 reinforces the main frame 15 that surrounds the outside, and at the same time, functions as a support member and a guide member that slidably support the movable unit 101 as described later.
- connection box 106 is arranged so as to be embedded in the connection box support portion 16c of the hollow tubular subframe 16. That is, the display panel 109 on the upper surface of the connection box 106 is located along the upper surface of the connection box support portion 16c, and the internal mechanism is housed in the hollow portion of the subframe 16.
- the display panel 109 has a display unit 109a made of a liquid crystal display or the like, and also includes a plurality of small connectors 109b. Further, a light switch 109c for turning on / off the LED light 76, which will be described later, is arranged on the display panel 109. As shown in FIG. 9, a lower cover 108 made of a metal plate of the connection box 106 is detachably attached to the lower surface of the connection box support portion 16c.
- a relatively large main connector 107 is arranged behind the lower part of the connection box 106.
- the main connector 107 is located below the lateral beam 16b of the subframe 16 and is provided so as to direct rearward.
- a relatively large centralized connector 116 (see FIG. 9) at the tip of a cable (not shown) drawn into the vehicle from an external control device is connected to the main connector 107.
- the above-mentioned flat band-shaped cable 100 that electrically connects the movable unit 101 and the connection box 106 is connected to the connection box 106 above the main connector 107, and is connected to the pair of subbeams 16a of the subframe 16. It reaches the movable unit 101 through the gap.
- the cable 100 has a structure that cannot be curved toward the outer periphery due to a chain-shaped protective member, and allows the movable unit 101 to move while maintaining a U-shape or a J-shape substantially along the inclination of the sub-beam 16a. doing.
- a metal guide rail 20 for slidably guiding the movable unit 101 is attached to the lower surface of each of the pair of sub-beams 16a, as will be described later.
- the channel-shaped guide rail 20 is attached so that the rail surface faces downward, and the sub-beam 16a is provided so that a part of the guide rail 20 overlaps the range of the lateral beam 16b from the vicinity of the rear end (that is, the upper end) of the sub-beam 16a. It extends over the entire length.
- the lower surface of the lower end (front end) of the main frame 15 which is the open end side of the U-shape connected to each other via the connection box support portion 16c of the subframe 16, that is, the lower surface of the front end of the pair of main beams 15a has a disk shape.
- the leg mounting seats 33 are formed. Cylindrical legs 12 are attached to the leg attachment seats 33, respectively.
- the leg portion 12 has a male screw shown at the upper end protruding along the center line of the leg portion 12, while the leg mounting seat portion 33 has a metal nut portion (not shown) at the center.
- the leg portion 12 is detachably attached by screwing the male screw of the leg portion 12 into the nut portion. For example, when mounting the vehicle automatic driving device 1 on a vehicle, it is easy to arrange the frame 11 on the driver's seat 2 with the legs 12 removed, and then attach the legs 12.
- the height adjusting screw 13 is provided at the lower end of the leg portion 12, and fine adjustment is possible so that the leg portion 12 surely contacts the vehicle body floor 6 while mounted on the vehicle.
- a spherical optional component mounting portion 14 is provided on the upper surface of the lower end (front end) of the main beam 15a.
- the optional component mounting portion 14 is located at a position where it overlaps with the leg portion 12 in a plan view. That is, the leg portion 12 is located on the lower surface side of the main beam 15a, and the optional component mounting portion 14 is located on the upper surface side.
- the optional component mounting portion 14 is used for mounting an optional component, for example, an actuator for an air conditioner.
- a slide rail 31 for supporting a pedal actuator extending in the vehicle width direction is attached to the front end surface of the pair of main beams 15a, and the pair of main beams 15a are connected to each other by the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator.
- the slide rail 31 is provided with a pair of left and right rail support brackets 32 on the back surface, and is attached to the front end surface of the main beam 15a so as to face the front of the vehicle via these brackets 32.
- the slide rail 31 is formed of an elongated plate shape from a metal material so as to have sufficient rigidity, and is integrally formed with the rail support bracket 32 in the illustrated example.
- the open end of the substantially U-shaped main frame 15 is closed by the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator. That is, as shown in FIG. 5, the main frame 15 and the slide rail 31 form a closed quadrangle or barrel in a plan view.
- the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator is provided with a first guide surface 31a and a second guide surface 31b having a semicircular cross section on the upper edge and the lower edge on the front surface side, respectively, and these first and second guide surfaces.
- the pedal actuator support 51 is slidably supported by 31a and 31b.
- three pedal actuator supports 51 are provided corresponding to the three pedal actuators 41 (accelerator pedal actuator 41A, brake pedal actuator 41B, clutch pedal actuator 41C). Details of the pedal actuator support 51 and details of each pedal actuator 41 attached to the pedal actuator support 51 will be described later.
- the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator which has an elongated plate shape as a whole, is provided with a large number of openings for weight reduction, and unnecessary parts are lightened.
- the upper edge portion and the lower edge portion constituting the first guide surface 31a and the second guide surface 31b have a rod-like appearance with a semicircular cross section.
- FIG. 12 shows a state in which the frame 11 is mounted on the driver's seat 2.
- the belt 25 is laid between the seat support 27 provided on the back of the driver's seat 2, and the frame 11 is fixed on the driver's seat 2 by tightening the belt 25 with a tightener (not shown). ing.
- the frame 11 is in a posture of extending diagonally downward from the upper end of the seat back 4 to the front end of the seat cushion 3.
- the strip-shaped lateral beam 15b of the main frame 15 makes wide surface contact with the upper part of the seat back 4 as a seat back contact portion, from which the main beam 15a extends diagonally toward the front end of the seat cushion 3 and is the main.
- the front end of the beam 15a is slightly projected from the front end of the seat cushion 3.
- the leg portion 12 extends downward from the front end of the frame 11 along the front end of the seat cushion 3, and the lower end provided with the height adjusting screw 13 is in contact with the vehicle body floor 6.
- the legs 12 are basically arranged in a vertical position on the vehicle body floor 6.
- Arrows F1, F2, and F3 in FIG. 2 indicate the load generated at the support point by tightening the belt 25.
- the frame 11 is pulled diagonally downward as shown by the arrow F1. Due to this tensile force, the leg portion 12 is pressed against the vehicle body floor 6 as shown by the arrow F2.
- the seat back contact portion at the upper end (rear end) of the frame 11, that is, the lateral beam 16b is pressed against the upper end portion of the seat back 4 as shown by an arrow F3.
- the frame 11 including the main frame 15 and the subframe 16 is not supported by the seat cushion 3. That is, the frame 11 is fixed by a total of three points, that is, two points of the leg portion 12 and the seat back contact portion, and a tension action point of the belt 25 (near the belt loop 26) in the intermediate portion between these two points.
- the tension action point (belt loop 26) of the belt 25 is located near the center of the line segment (virtual straight line) connecting the lower end of the leg portion 12 and the seat back contact portion, which is a fixed point with respect to the vehicle. Is located, and the tensile force of the belt 25 acts in a direction substantially orthogonal to the line segment, so that the frame 11 is efficiently and firmly fixed and supported.
- the seat cushion 3 is flexibly configured to ensure riding comfort, whereas the seat back 4 is firmly configured to ensure load bearing capacity in the event of a collision. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently tighten the belt 25 to apply a large tensile load, and the support of the frame 11 becomes firmer as compared with the case where the belt 25 is placed on the seat cushion 3.
- the load of the entire vehicle automatic driving device 1 including the transmission actuator unit 131, the pedal actuator 41, and the like also acts on the leg portion 12 and the seat back contact portion, and the seat It does not act on the cushion 3.
- the load of the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is supported at two locations, the vehicle body floor 6 and the seat back 4.
- the seat back 4 is firmly configured, the support of the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is ensured, and the vibration of the vehicle automatic driving device 1 due to the vehicle vibration during the test and the reaction force at the time of operation of various actuators are ensured.
- the misalignment of the vehicle automatic driving device 1 due to the above is suppressed.
- the reaction force when the pedal actuator 41 is operated acts diagonally upward, but the seat back contact portion (horizontal beam 16b) is located substantially along the reaction force action line. Therefore, the reaction force is surely supported by the solid seat back 4.
- the rubber portions 30 are provided at both ends of the upper edge of the lateral beam 16b which is the shoulder portion of the frame 11, damage to the skin of the seat back 4 is suppressed.
- the rubber portion 30 also functions as a non-slip, and the displacement of the entire frame 11 in the front-rear direction due to the reaction force when the pedal actuator 41 is operated is suppressed.
- FIG. 8 shows a state in which the movable unit 101 is assembled to the frame 11, and FIGS. 13 and 14 show the movable unit 101 in a single state.
- the movable unit 101 is located in the frame 11, specifically, between the pair of main beams 15a of the main frame 15.
- the movable unit 101 includes a movable frame 102 supported by a pair of subbeams 16a, and a rigid actuator support plate 105 located at the upper end or the upper surface of the movable frame 102. ing.
- the movable frame 102 includes a pair of left and right side frames 103 forming side surfaces of the movable frame 102, and a second connection box 104 having a triangular cross section sandwiched between the pair of side frames 103. There is.
- each side frame 103 is configured as one member by using, for example, carbon fiber reinforced plastic (CFRP), and has a substantially triangular shape having an obtuse apex angle in a side view. .. That is, it has a substantially triangular shape having one side 103a that is basically horizontal in the vehicle-mounted state, one side 103b that extends diagonally downward from the front end of this side 103a, and a base 103c that is inclined along the sub-beam 16a. Then, a plurality of windows are formed so as to form a truss structure.
- CFRP carbon fiber reinforced plastic
- the pair of side frames 103 are connected to each other by the second connection box 104.
- the second connection box 104 includes a front wall 104a along the side 103b of the side frame 103, a rear wall 104b inclined so as to be parallel to the bottom side 103c of the side frame 103, and a pair of side walls 104c adjacent to the side frame 103. And, wirings (not shown) are housed in the internal space.
- the tip of the above-mentioned flat band-shaped cable 100 extending from the connection box 106 is connected to the second connection box 104 from the rear wall 104b side.
- a slider cover plate 111 having a substantially rectangular plate shape is attached to the bottom 103c of the pair of side frames 103, respectively.
- the pair of slider cover plates 111 are provided so as to project inward from each side frame 103. That is, the pair of side frames 103 are located adjacent to the outer side of the sub beam 16a in the vehicle width direction, and the slider cover plate 111 projects from the bottom side 103c of each side frame 103 so as to cover the lower surface of the sub beam 16a.
- Two front and rear sliders 110 corresponding to the guide rail 20 on the lower surface of the sub beam 16a described above are attached to the upper surface of each slider cover plate 111 facing the lower surface of the sub beam 16a (see FIG. 14).
- the slider 110 is slidably engaged with the channel-shaped guide rail 20. By engaging the slider 110 with the guide rail 20, the load of the movable unit 101 is supported, and the movable unit 101 is slidably guided in the direction along the sub-beam 16a.
- the sliders 110 are located at two locations in the front-rear direction, and are arranged at a total of four locations so as to form the vertices of a quadrangle as a whole of the movable unit 101. , High rigidity against the reaction force acting on the movable unit 101 when the transmission actuator unit 131 is operated can be obtained.
- the guide mechanism obtained by combining the guide rail 20 and the slider 110 generally has high rigidity or guidance accuracy in the width direction (direction along the mounting surface) of the guide rail 20. Therefore, by adopting the illustrated configuration in which the pair of guide rails 20 are arranged in a posture facing downward in the vertical direction, high support rigidity of the movable unit 101 in the vehicle width direction can be obtained.
- At least one of the two front and rear sliders 110 is configured to provide friction with the guide rail 20 to the extent that the movable unit 101 does not move due to its own weight.
- Each slider cover plate 111 is further provided with a fixing screw 113 that is screwed into a screw hole that penetrates the slider cover plate 111.
- the fixing screw 113 is configured so that it can be rotated by a finger, and its tip presses a pad or shoe (not shown) between the two sliders 110. That is, when the fixing screw 113 is screwed toward the guide rail 20, the tip of the screw comes into pressure contact with the guide rail 20 via the pad or shoe, whereby the slide mechanism is locked so that the movable unit 101 does not move.
- the operator can easily access the fixing screw 113 through, for example, a gap created between the seat cushion 3 or the seat back 4 and the main frame 15.
- the actuator support plate 105 made of a metal plate has a rectangular shape in a plan view, and is arranged along the horizontal side 103a of the triangular side frame 103.
- the actuator support plate 105 is attached to the upper surface of the side 103a of the side frame 103, and connects a pair of side frames 103 located in parallel to each other.
- the vehicle width dimension of the actuator support plate 105 is larger than the vehicle width dimension formed by the pair of side frames 103, so that the side portions on both sides of the actuator support plate 105 are each outside the side frame 103. It protrudes to.
- the second connection box 104 is attached so as to cover the lower surface of the actuator support plate 105. In a plan view, the actuator support plate 105 is located on the front side of the movable frame 102, and the rear end portion of the side frame 103 projects rearward from the actuator support plate 105.
- the transmission actuator unit 131 is detachably attached to the upper surface of the actuator support plate 105 as described later (see FIGS. 15 and 16).
- grommets 121 having lock holes 121a are embedded at two positions in the four corners of the rectangular actuator support plate 105. That is, the grommet 121 includes the front grommet 121A and the rear grommet 121B, both of which are arranged on the diagonal line of the quadrangle. Since all of these have the same configuration, they are collectively referred to as grommet 121 when it is not necessary to distinguish them individually.
- the actuator support plate 105 is provided with a transmission actuator unit connector 123 for making an electrical connection with the transmission actuator unit 131.
- the transmission actuator unit connector 123 includes a front connector 123A and a rear connector 123B.
- the front connector 123A is located on the front side of the actuator support plate 105 and is adjacent to the front grommet 121A.
- the rear connector 123B is located on the rear side of the actuator support plate 105 and is adjacent to the rear grommet 121B. Since all of these have the same configuration, they are collectively referred to as the transmission actuator unit connector 123 when it is not necessary to distinguish them individually.
- the terminal piece protrudes upward from the upper surface of the actuator support plate 105 (that is, the mounting surface of the transmission actuator unit 131), and a slight positional deviation from the mating side can be tolerated.
- a connector in which the terminal pieces are configured in a floating state is used.
- the transmission actuator unit connector 123 is provided with a guide pin 123a and a guide sleeve 123b for guiding the connector at the time of positioning or insertion with the connector on the other side.
- the connector 123 for the transmission actuator unit general-purpose parts available on the market can be used.
- Each terminal of the transmission actuator unit connector 123 is connected to the wiring housed in the second connection box 104, and is finally connected to the connection box 106 from the second connection box 104 via the cable 100. ing.
- the front grommet 121A and the front connector 123A located on the front side of the actuator support plate 105 and the rear grommet 121B and the rear connector 123B located on the rear side of the actuator support plate 105 form a rectangular shape of the actuator support plate 105.
- the actuator support plate 105 is provided with a square locating opening 124 for positioning the transmission actuator unit 131.
- the locating opening 124 includes a front locating opening 124A and a rear locating opening 124B.
- the front locating opening 124A is arranged on the front side of the actuator support plate 105 at a position opposite to the front grommet 121A in the vehicle width direction.
- the rear locating opening 124B is arranged on the rear side of the actuator support plate 105 at a position opposite to the rear grommet 121B in the vehicle width direction.
- the front locating opening 124A and the rear locating opening 124B are in a point-symmetrical relationship with the center of the actuator support plate 105, which also has a rectangular shape, as a point of symmetry.
- each of the left and right side edges of the actuator support plate 105 is provided with a substantially U-shaped notch 125 for locating for positioning the transmission actuator unit 131.
- the two locating notches 125 are located at the center of the left and right side edges, and are line-symmetrical and point-symmetrical to each other.
- FIG. 6 to 8 show a state in which the transmission actuator unit 131 is attached to the upper surface of the movable unit 101, and in particular, it is a diagram for explaining the position adjustment of the movable unit 101 with respect to the frame 11.
- the movable unit 101 can be slid up and down (that is, back and forth) along the sub-beam 16a of the frame 11.
- FIG. 6 shows a state in which the movable unit 101 is set at a relatively high position
- FIGS. 7 and 8 show a state in which the movable unit 101 is set at a relatively low position.
- the transmission actuator unit 131 when the position of the movable unit 101 is raised as shown in FIG. 6, the transmission actuator unit 131 is relatively retracted, and when the position of the movable unit 101 is lowered as shown in FIG. 7, the transmission actuator unit 131 is relatively retracted.
- Such a change in the front-rear direction can be absorbed by setting the initial position of the shift actuator 134 that operates in the front-rear direction.
- the front-rear position of the shift lever in the vehicle is the same in the case of FIG. 6 and the case of FIG. 7, the distance to the shift lever is relatively high when the position of the movable unit 101 is raised as shown in FIG.
- it can be easily dealt with by setting the position where the grip hand 168 protrudes relatively long as the control reference position.
- the shift actuator 134 can swing up and down with respect to the select actuator 133. Therefore, even with this vertical swing, it is possible to cope with a slight difference in the height position of the shift lever head.
- the vertical and front-rear position adjustments of the movable unit 101 can be performed with the vehicle automatic driving device 1 mounted on the driver's seat 2 as shown in FIG. Therefore, no trial and error work is required, and after the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is assembled in the vehicle, it can be easily adjusted so that the positional relationship with the shift lever is optimized.
- the transmission actuator unit 131 has a configuration that can be easily attached to and detached from the movable unit 101. Then, by reversing the mounting posture (front-rear direction) with respect to the movable unit 101 by 180 °, the mode can be easily changed between the mode for a so-called right-hand drive vehicle and the mode for a left-hand drive vehicle.
- the transmission actuator unit 131 is configured by combining a select actuator 133 that performs a select operation along the vehicle width direction and a shift actuator 134 that performs a shift operation along the vehicle front-rear direction. ..
- the transmission actuator unit 131 is provided with a relatively thick and highly rigid base plate 132, and a select actuator 133 is configured on the base plate 132.
- the select actuator 133 has an actuator housing 135 that has an elongated box shape along the vehicle width direction, and the actuator housing 135 is fixed on the base plate 132. Further, in the central portion of the actuator housing 135 in the longitudinal direction, a box-shaped connector cover 137 is provided on one side, and a box-shaped motor cover 138 is provided on the other side.
- the connector cover 137 is integrally continuous with the actuator housing 135.
- the base plate 132 has a flat plate shape, and as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, has an outer shape substantially along the outer contours of the actuator housing 135, the connector cover 137, and the motor cover 138. ing. That is, the base plate 132 has a shape in which the width (dimensions in the vehicle front-rear direction) is narrow at both ends in the longitudinal direction and the width is wide at the center.
- the select actuator 133 is a pinion rack type linear motion actuator in which the rack shaft 141, which is the actuator rod, moves in the vehicle width direction by the action of the electric motor and the speed reducer housed in the motor cover 138. Almost the entire rack shaft 141 is housed in the actuator housing 135 in the retracted state, and one end of the actuator housing 135 (the end that is on the left hand side when the connector cover 137 is directed forward). Only the tip of the rack shaft 141 protrudes from the rack shaft 141. A shift actuator 134 is supported at the tip of the rack shaft 141, as will be described later. In the configuration for a so-called right-hand drive vehicle shown in FIG.
- the shift actuator 134 is located on the left hand side with respect to the frame 11 and the movable unit 101 located on the driver's seat 2.
- the rack shaft 141 is guided by a guide mechanism (not shown) inside the actuator housing 135 so that the rack shaft 141 can move linearly with high accuracy while bearing the load of the shift actuator 134.
- the base plate 132 is the actuator housing 135 and It projects from the contours of the connector cover 137 and the motor cover 138, and is formed as a pair of extension portions 132a located diagonally.
- the quadrangular range of the central portion of the base plate 132 including the extension portion 132a has a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the actuator support plate 105 of the movable unit 101.
- Each of the pair of extension portions 132a is provided with a lock pin 144 constituting the lock mechanism 143 together with the grommet 121 of the actuator support plate 105 on the movable unit 101 side described above.
- the lower end of the lock pin 144 projects downward from the surface of the base plate 132, and the upper end is provided with a knob portion 145 for rotational operation by fingers.
- the lock mechanism 143 is a general-purpose screw type that locks with axial tightening by rotating the lock pin 144 inserted into the lock hole 121a of the grommet 121 by a certain angle (for example, 90 ° to 180 °). (See FIGS. 15 and 16).
- the lock pin 144 on the connector cover 137 side is referred to as the first lock pin 144A
- the lock pin 144 on the motor cover 138 side is referred to as the second lock pin 144B. I will call it.
- the pair of lock pins 144 engage with the grommet 121 of the actuator support plate 105, respectively. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 and the like, in the mode for a so-called right-hand drive vehicle, the first lock pin 144A engages with the front grommet 121A located on the front side of the actuator support plate 105, and the rear side of the actuator support plate 105. The second lock pin 144B engages with the rear grommet 121B located at. By locking the pair of locking mechanisms 143, the base plate 132 is tightened against the actuator support plate 105 and is firmly fixed.
- a transmission actuator side connector 171 corresponding to the transmission actuator unit connector 123 in the actuator support plate 105 is provided on the bottom surface of the base plate 132, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, a transmission actuator side connector 171 corresponding to the transmission actuator unit connector 123 in the actuator support plate 105 is provided.
- the connector 171 is located at a position covered by the connector cover 137, and particularly corresponds to the front connector 123A when the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the actuator support plate 105 in the above-described aspect for a right-hand drive vehicle. It is arranged in the position of.
- the connector 171 has a terminal piece configured in a floating state and is provided with a guide pin 171a and a guide sleeve 171b, corresponding to the connector 123 on the actuator support plate 105 side.
- the connector cover 137 covers the portion of the connector 171.
- a cable (not shown) leading to the connector 171 is also wired through the inside of the connector cover 137 and the actuator housing 135, and is not exposed to the outside.
- a rectangular opening 175 having the same size as the connector 171 is formed at a position of the base plate 132 that is point-symmetrical to the transmission actuator side connector 171.
- the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the actuator support plate 105 in the above-described aspect for a right-hand drive vehicle, the protruding portion including the guide pin 171a of the unused rear connector 123B is received by the opening 175. NS. That is, the unused rear connector 123B does not interfere with the base plate 132.
- leg portions 176 for protecting the connector 171 are provided so as to project in a prismatic shape.
- the leg portion 176 includes a first leg portion 176A located below the motor cover 138, and a second leg portion 176B and a third leg portion 176C located laterally apart from each other on the center line of the base plate 132. ..
- the first leg portion 176A is located at a position corresponding to the rear locating opening 124B of the actuator support plate 105 when the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the actuator support plate 105 in the above-described aspect for a right-hand drive vehicle. It fits relatively tightly into the rear locating opening 124B.
- the second leg portion 176B and the third leg portion 176C are provided on the left and right side edges of the actuator support plate 105 when the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the actuator support plate 105 in the same manner for a right-hand drive vehicle. It is located at a position corresponding to each of the pair of locating notches 125 and engages with the locating notches 125 relatively tightly.
- the transmission actuator unit 131 By engaging these three leg portions 176 with the rear locating opening 124B and the locating notch 125 of the actuator support plate 105, the transmission actuator unit 131 is reliably positioned with respect to the actuator support plate 105. That is, it serves as a guide when the transmission actuator unit 131 is attached, and also contributes to the improvement of the support rigidity with respect to the actuator support plate 105 after the attachment.
- the leg portion 176 By relatively tightly engaging the leg portion 176 with the locating opening 124 and the locating notch 125, for example, the displacement due to the reaction force during operation of the transmission actuator unit 131 is suppressed.
- the leg portion 176 enters the locating opening 124 or the locating notch 125 before the connectors 123 and 171 interfere with each other. It is desirable to set the protruding length of the transmission actuator unit 131 so that the mounting position of the transmission actuator unit 131 is guided by the above.
- the three legs 176 have the same protruding length, and this protruding length is larger than the protruding length of the lock pin 144 on the bottom surface of the base plate 132 and the protruding length of the guide pin 171a and the guide sleeve 171b of the connector 171. Therefore, when the removed transmission actuator unit 131 is placed on an appropriate stand, the transmission actuator unit 131 can be supported by these three legs 176, and the lock pin 144 and the connector 171 are placed. Does not interfere with the platform.
- a stopper pin 181 constituting a stopper mechanism 182 (see FIG. 25) for locking the select actuator 133 is provided at a position adjacent to the first leg portion 176A (FIG. 25). 22).
- the stopper pin 181 is arranged so as to be able to advance and retreat along a direction orthogonal to the bottom surface of the base plate 132, and is constantly urged in the protruding direction by an internal coil spring 185 (see FIG. 24).
- the stopper pin 181 abuts on the upper surface of the actuator support plate 105 and is pushed back by the actuator support plate 105.
- the stopper pin 181 has a protruding position in a free state when the transmission actuator unit 131 is removed, and when the transmission actuator unit 131 is attached to the actuator support plate 105 and is pushed by the actuator support plate 105. Has a retracted position and. Then, at the protruding position of the stopper pin 181 the internal stopper mechanism 182 locks or fixes the select actuator 133, and at the retracted position of the stopper pin 181 the stopper mechanism 182 releases the select actuator 133, that is, in a free state.
- the electric motor of the select actuator 133 is configured to drive a speed reducer 184 composed of a gear train via a bevel gear 183 so that the rack shaft 141 moves forward and backward.
- a speed reducer 184 composed of a gear train via a bevel gear 183 so that the rack shaft 141 moves forward and backward.
- the speed reducer One of the gears 184a in 184 and the claw piece 181a of the stopper pin 181 mesh with each other. That is, when the stopper pin 181 is in the protruding position, the claw piece 181a of the stopper pin 181 engages with the gear 184a, which makes it impossible to rotate the speed reducer 184.
- the claw piece 181a of the stopper pin 181 and the gear 184a are positioned apart in the axial direction of the stopper pin 181, and the gear 184a can freely rotate.
- the protruding length of the stopper pin 181 at the protruding position is set shorter than the protruding length of the three legs 176 on the bottom surface of the base plate 132. Therefore, even if the removed transmission actuator unit 131 is placed on the floor or the like, the lock will not be released. In addition, unnecessary damage to the stopper pin 181 due to a collision with the floor surface or the like is avoided.
- the outside of the leading edge (edge on the connector cover 137 side) including the extension 132a of the base plate 132 substantially corresponds to the shape of the leading edge of the actuator support plate 105.
- the outer shape of the trailing edge (the edge on the motor cover 138 side) including the extension 132a of the base plate 132 substantially corresponds to the trailing edge shape of the actuator support plate 105.
- the rear connector 123B which is not used in the right-hand drive vehicle aspect, is covered by the base plate 132 of the motor cover 138 portion. That is, the unused rear connector 123B is not exposed.
- the actuator support plate 105 is inside the main frame 15 in a plan view.
- the left and right ends of the actuator housing 135 protruding from the subframe 16 in the vehicle width direction are located at heights above the main beam 15a of the main frame 15 (see FIG. 2 and the like). Therefore, the movable unit 101 and the transmission actuator unit 131 can be slid up and down and back and forth without interfering with the actuator housing 135 and the main beam 15a.
- Each part is set so that the actuator housing 135 and the main beam 15a do not interfere with each other even at the position where the movable unit 101 is retracted to the maximum and the position where the movable unit 101 is advanced to the maximum.
- a substantially U-shaped handle 136 that can be gripped by the operator is attached to the upper surface 135a of the actuator housing 135 so that the operator can carry the removed transmission actuator unit 131.
- the handle 136 is arranged at a position corresponding to the position of the center of gravity of the entire transmission actuator unit 131 including the shift actuator 134. Therefore, the transmission actuator unit 131 does not tilt significantly when lifted via the handle 136, facilitating the transport work and facilitating the attachment / detachment work to the movable unit 101.
- the transmission actuator unit 131 can be removed from the movable unit 101 simply by loosening the pair of lock mechanisms 143. Then, conversely, the transmission actuator unit 131 is placed on the movable unit 101, and the pair of lock pins 144 are rotated by fingers to lock the lock mechanism 143, so that the lock mechanism 143 can be attached to the movable unit 101. At the same time as the installation, the connectors 123 and 171 are electrically connected, and there is no need to connect an external cable.
- the transmission actuator unit 131 is left removed from the frame 11 (movable unit 101), the frame 11 is fixed and supported on the driver's seat 2, and then the transmission actuator is mounted in the vehicle.
- the unit 131 can be attached to the movable unit 101.
- the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is removed from the vehicle, it is easy to remove the transmission actuator unit 131 first.
- the vehicle automatic driving device 1 can be easily carried in and out of the vehicle through the door opening.
- the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133 is fixed by the stopper mechanism 182 using the stopper pin 181, so that the removed transmission actuator unit 131 can be easily handled. Since the rack shaft 141 does not protrude due to its own weight, for example, the rack shaft 141 does not inadvertently protrude and damage the door opening.
- the transmission actuator unit 131 removed from the movable unit 101 can be attached to the movable unit 101 by reversing the front and rear by 180 °.
- the shift lever can easily correspond to a vehicle located on the right side of the driver's seat 2, that is, a so-called left-hand drive vehicle.
- the motor cover 138 is used as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27.
- the connector cover 137 is located on the front side and the connector cover 137 is located on the rear side.
- the pair of lock pins 144 arranged diagonally on the transmission actuator unit 131 are combined with the diagonal grommet 121, which is different from the mode for right-hand drive vehicles, and are locked by the rotation operation by the knob 145. That is, the second lock pin 144B engages with the front grommet 121A, and the first lock pin 144A engages with the rear grommet 121B.
- the transmission actuator side connector 171 is connected to the rear side connector 123B of the actuator support plate 105.
- the unused front connector 123A is received by the opening 175 of the base plate 132 to avoid interference with the base plate 132 and is not exposed to the outside.
- the three legs 176 on the lower surface of the base plate 132 engage relatively tightly with the front locating opening 124A of the actuator support plate 105 and the pair of left and right locating notches 125.
- the center of the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133 is at the same position in both the mounting posture for the right-hand drive vehicle and the mounting posture for the left-hand drive vehicle, and does not change from each other. That is, the rack shaft 141 is always located at the center of the actuator support plate 105 in the front-rear direction.
- the shift lever Since the position of the shift lever is on the front side of the rack shaft 141 of 133, it becomes necessary to change the direction of the shift actuator 134 (that is, which side the grip hand 168 is on the front or rear side). In this embodiment, the front-rear direction of the shift actuator 134 is easily reversed.
- 21 and 22 show a state in which the shift actuator 134 is removed from the select actuator 133.
- the orientation of the shift actuator 134 (posture with respect to the select actuator 133) in these figures corresponds to the mode for a so-called right-hand drive vehicle as shown in FIG.
- the rack shaft 141 that advances and retreats from the actuator housing 135 of the select actuator 133 has a prismatic shape, and an L-shaped bracket 151 is attached to the tip thereof via a joint 152 that is rotatably supported.
- the joint 152 has a rotation center axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rack shaft 141, and the L-shaped bracket 151 is swingably supported around the rotation center axis.
- the L-shaped bracket 151 has a rectangular mounting surface 151a forming a plane parallel to the rotation center axis of the joint 152, and on both sides of the mounting surface 151a, a first guide surface 151b rising vertically from the mounting surface 151a and A second guide surface 151c is provided.
- the rotation center axis of the joint 152 is below the rack shaft 141, and the mounting surface 151a is offset below the rotation center axis of the joint 152. Therefore, the mounting surface 151a is located below the extension line of the rack shaft 141. Further, the first guide surface 151b and the second guide surface 151c extend in a direction orthogonal to the rotation center axis of the joint 152 (in other words, a direction orthogonal to the rack axis 141) and are parallel to each other.
- a lock pin 155 constituting the lock mechanism 154 is arranged at the center of the mounting surface 151a of the L-shaped bracket 151.
- the lock mechanism 154 is a general-purpose screw-type lock mechanism substantially the same as the above-mentioned lock mechanism 143 for fixing the transmission actuator unit 131, and the lower end of the lock pin 155 is rotated by a finger.
- the knob portion 156 is provided.
- the shift actuator 134 includes a box-shaped actuator housing 161 having a rectangular bottom surface, a speed reducer 163 housed inside the actuator housing 161 and the speed reducer 163. It includes a connected electric motor 165 and a rack shaft 166 as an actuator rod whose tip protrudes from the end of the actuator housing 161.
- the rack shaft 166 has a rod shape with a circular cross section as a basic shape excluding the tooth portion.
- the actuator housing 161 includes a cylindrical portion 161a that extends linearly rearward, and when the rack shaft 166 is in the retracted position, most of the rack shaft 166 is housed in the cylindrical portion 161a. Further, the corner portion of the box-shaped actuator housing 161 opposite to the electric motor 165 has an inclined surface.
- the above-mentioned grip hand 168 is attached to the tip of the rack shaft 166.
- the grip hand 168 has a bifurcated fixed finger 168a, a movable finger 168b that can be opened and closed with respect to the fixed finger 168a, and a fixing screw 169 that opens and closes and tightens and fixes the movable finger 168b with respect to the fixed finger 168a. And have.
- the grip hand 168 grips a knob or grip on the head of a shift lever (not shown), but various knobs or grips having different shapes and sizes can be adjusted by opening and closing the fingers 168a and 168b via a fixing screw 169. It can be gripped.
- the bottom surface of the actuator housing 161 is composed of a relatively thick bottom plate 161b having high rigidity, and the bottom plate 161b is a rectangle having a long side in the longitudinal direction of the rack shaft 166 as shown in FIG. Is doing. Further, the width of the bottom plate 161b on the short side is substantially equal to the width of the mounting surface 151a of the L-shaped bracket 151 described above, that is, the distance between the first guide surface 151b and the second guide surface 151c. That is, the bottom plate 161b has dimensions that can be relatively tightly fitted to the mounting surfaces 151a sandwiched between the first and second guide surfaces 151b and 151c of the L-shaped bracket 151.
- a grommet 162 having a lock hole 162a with which the lock pin 155 is engaged is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 161b.
- the grommet 162 is the same as the grommet 121 in the actuator support plate 105 described above, and constitutes the lock mechanism 154 together with the lock pin 155.
- the bottom plate 161b is placed on the mounting surface 151a of the L-shaped bracket 151. It is tightened. As a result, the shift actuator 134 is fixed on the L-shaped bracket 151. In this mounted state, the left and right side edges of the bottom plate 161b engage with the first and second guide surfaces 151b and 151c of the L-shaped bracket 151, so that the shift actuator 134 does not tilt to the left or right. That is, the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133 and the rack shaft 166 of the shift actuator 134 always maintain a correct orthogonal state at all times.
- the rack shaft 166 center axis intersects the swing center of the L-shaped bracket 151, that is, the rotation center axis of the joint 152. Therefore, the rack shaft 166 having the grip hand 168 at the tip can swing up and down about the swing center on the central axis of the rack shaft 166.
- the lock hole 162a of the grommet 162 is located at the center of the bottom plate 161b on the lower surface of the actuator housing 161 at least at the center of the width along the short side direction of the bottom plate 161b. Therefore, even in the mounting posture in which the shift actuator 134 is inverted by 180 °, the bottom plate 161b is relatively tightly fitted to the mounting surface 151a between the first and second guide surfaces 151b and 151c of the L-shaped bracket 151. And the lock pin 155 matches the lock hole 162a.
- the select actuator 133 and the shift actuator 134 are two cables from the tip of the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133 to the electric motor 165 of the shift actuator 134. It is connected by 167.
- the cable 167 has a minimum length required for removing the shift actuator 134 from the L-shaped bracket 151 and reversing the posture. Therefore, basically, the posture of the shift actuator 134 can be reversed without removing the cable 167. If desired, the cable 167 can also be removed from the shift actuator 134.
- the cable 167 extends through the inside of the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133, and is finally connected to the connector 171 on the lower surface of the base plate 132. Therefore, the length of the cable 167 exposed to the outside is minimized.
- FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the shift actuator 134 in a cross section along the central axis of the rack shaft 166. Specifically, the cross section of the state where it is fixedly supported on the L-shaped bracket 151 via the lock mechanism 154 is shown.
- the shift actuator 134 is a pinion rack type linear motion actuator in which the rack shaft 166, which is an actuator rod, moves in the front-rear direction of the vehicle by the action of the electric motor 165 and the speed reducer 163.
- a speed reducer 163 composed of a speed reduction gear train in which a plurality of gears 164 are combined is housed inside the box-shaped actuator housing 161 to reduce the rotation of the electric motor 165.
- the rack shaft 166 is formed with a rack 166a that meshes with the pinion at the final stage of the gear train.
- the entire transmission actuator unit 131 is selectively mounted on the movable unit 101 in one of the two mounting postures, and the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the movable unit 101.
- FIGS. 17 and 18 show a mode for a right-hand drive vehicle, in which the grip hand 168 is located on the left side of the frame 11.
- the grip hand 168 is located in front of the actuator housing 135 of the select actuator 133.
- the select actuator 133 of the transmission actuator unit 131 and the shift actuator 134 are combined in the manner shown in FIGS. 17 and 18.
- FIGS. 26 and 27 show an aspect for a left-hand drive vehicle, in which the grip hand 168 is located on the right side of the frame 11.
- the grip hand 168 is also located in front of the actuator housing 135 of the select actuator 133.
- the select actuator 133 of the transmission actuator unit 131 and the shift actuator 134 are combined in an inverted manner as shown in the figure.
- the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted as shown in FIG.
- the shift actuator 134 can be combined with the select actuator 133 in a front-rear inverted manner.
- the grip hand 168 is relatively rearward.
- Such a configuration is the same in the mode for a left-hand drive vehicle.
- the shift actuator 134 can be combined in a front-rear inverted manner.
- the height position or the front-rear position of the select actuator 133 can be changed by the slide position of the movable unit 101 with respect to the frame 11. Therefore, by combining with the change of the front-rear direction of the shift actuator 134, various shifts can be made. It is possible to correspond to the lever position.
- the height position of the head of the shift lever is generally displaced up and down with the shift operation, but since the shift actuator 134 can swing up and down around the rotation center axis of the joint 152, the shift lever Changes in the height position of the head are allowed. Therefore, a smooth shift operation is possible.
- Modification example of movable unit 101 39 to 41 show, as a modification of the movable unit 101, when the height position of the head of the shift lever is relatively high and it is necessary to operate it diagonally (for example, a short shift lever is attached to the dash panel in front of the driver's seat.
- the movable unit 101 provided with the tilt mechanism is shown so as to correspond to the arranged form and the like.
- each of the pair of side frames 103 has a configuration in which the outer side frame 103A and the inner side frame 103B are combined.
- the outer side frame 103A is located outside in the vehicle width direction, forms a substantially triangle having three sides 103Aa, 103Ab, 103Ac like the side frame 103 described above, and the upper side 103Aa is attached to the actuator support plate 105. It is fixed.
- the inner side frame 103B is overlapped along the inner side surface of the outer side frame 103A in the vehicle width direction, and forms a relatively small substantially triangle having three sides 103Ba, 103Bb, 103Bc.
- the slider cover plate 111 (including the two front and rear sliders 110 and the fixing screw 113) is attached to the bottom 103Bc of the inner side frame 103B. Therefore, the inner side frame 103B is guided by the sub-beam 16a so as to be slidable back and forth.
- the outer side frame 103A and the inner side frame 103B are swingably connected to each other via a hinge pin 186 at the rear apex.
- a lock screw 187 is provided at the lower apex of the outer side frame 103A, and the lock screw 187 is screwed onto the first grommet 188A or the second grommet 188B arranged at two locations above and below the front side 103Bb of the inner side frame 103B. It fits. That is, by selecting the grommet 188 into which the lock screw 187 is screwed, the inclination angle of the outer side frame 103A with respect to the slider 110 (in other words, the sub-beam 16a that guides the movable unit 101) can be changed.
- the actuator support plate 105 When the lock screw 187 is screwed into the lower first grommet 188A, the actuator support plate 105 is basically in a horizontal position. Therefore, the shift actuator 134 is basically in a horizontal posture.
- the actuator support plate 105 is in an inclined posture in which the front edge side is relatively high. Therefore, the shift actuator 134 is similarly tilted.
- the actuator support plate 105 can be tilted at an angle of, for example, about 30 °. Thereby, for example, even if the shift lever is arranged on the dash panel, the shift operation can be performed diagonally upward and diagonally downward.
- the tilt angle is changed in two stages, but it is also possible to arrange a larger number of grommets 188 so that the angle can be changed in more stages.
- the height position of the shift actuator 134 with respect to the height position of the select actuator 133 is fixedly determined, but the head positions of the shift levers are more diverse. It is also possible to change the height position of the shift actuator 134 with respect to the select actuator 133 so that the above can be easily dealt with.
- FIGS. 42 to 44 show a modified example of the support portion of the shift actuator 134.
- the L-shaped bracket 151A is attached to the tip of the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133 via the rotatably supported joint 152A. As shown in FIG. 42, both are attached. Are combined so that they can slide up and down.
- the joint 152A has a guide groove 221 along the vertical direction
- the L-shaped bracket 151A is formed with a guide rail portion 222 corresponding to the guide groove 221 along the vertical direction.
- the guide rail portion 222 is slidably engaged with the guide groove 221 so that the L-shaped bracket 151A can move up and down with respect to the joint 152A.
- a plunger 223 is attached to the front end surface of the joint 152A, and engagement holes 224 into which the tip end portion of the plunger 223 enters are formed at a plurality of locations, for example, three locations on the front edge of the guide rail portion 222. That is, the engaging holes 224 are arranged at three locations having different heights.
- the plunger 223 is always urged in a direction of engaging with the engagement hole 224 by an internal spring (not shown).
- FIG. 42 shows a state in which the L-shaped bracket 151A is in the lowest position, and the plunger 223 is engaged with the engagement hole 224 in the highest position.
- the center line of the rack shaft 166 of the shift actuator 134 intersects the rotation center axis of the joint 152A. If the operator pulls the plunger 223 with his / her fingers to release the engagement with the engagement hole 224 from this state, the height position of the L-shaped bracket 151A can be easily moved to the upper second position or the third position. Can be changed.
- FIG. 43 shows the state in which the L-shaped bracket 151A is in the highest position, and the plunger 223 is engaged with the engagement hole 224 in the lowest position.
- the height position of the shift actuator 134 with respect to the height position of the select actuator 133 can be easily adjusted in three stages.
- the vehicle automatic driving device 1 of the embodiment includes three pedal actuators 41, that is, an accelerator pedal actuator 41A, a brake pedal actuator 41B, and a clutch pedal actuator 41C. These pedal actuators 41 are supported by the pedal actuator support slide rail 31 attached to the front end of the frame 11 via the pedal actuator support 51.
- FIG. 32 shows the details of the pedal actuator support slide rail 31 and the pedal actuator support 51 arranged at the front end of the frame 11. Further, FIGS. 28 to 30 show the details of the brake pedal actuator 41B as a typical configuration of the pedal actuator 41.
- the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator has a strip shape extending in the vehicle width direction, and is made of a relatively thick and rigid metal plate. Then, in order to reduce the weight, unnecessary parts are lightened and openings are formed, and the upper edge portion and the lower edge portion form a rod shape with a semicircular cross section.
- a first guide surface 31a forming a semi-cylindrical surface is continuously formed on the upper edge of the slide rail 31 in the vehicle width direction, and a second guide forming a semi-cylindrical surface is formed on the lower edge of the slide rail 31.
- the surfaces 31b are continuously formed in the vehicle width direction.
- the first guide surface 31a and the second guide surface 31b have semicircular cross sections that are opposite to each other.
- the pedal actuator support 51 is formed by integrally molding each part using, for example, a hard synthetic resin, and has a vertically long length having dimensions extending above and below the slide rail 31 in a front view (meaning a state seen from the front of the vehicle). It has a rectangular shape.
- the pedal actuator support 51 has a rectangular base 51a that overlaps the front surface of the slide rail 31, an upper wall 51b that extends rearward of the vehicle above the first guide surface 31a, and an upper wall 51b that extends rearward of the vehicle below the second guide surface 31b. It includes a lower wall 51c and a pair of left and right side walls 51d.
- the pedal actuator support 51 is formed in a box shape having an open back surface toward the slide rail 31.
- the pair of side walls 51d has a semi-circular upper notch 51e that is slidably engaged with the first guide surface 31a and a semi-circular lower notch 51f that is slidably engaged with the second guide surface 31b. ..
- the pedal actuator support 51 is slidably supported by the pedal actuator supporting slide rail 31.
- each of the accelerator pedal actuator 41A, the brake pedal actuator 41B, and the clutch pedal actuator 41C can be easily positioned in the vehicle interior in the vehicle width direction so as to correspond to the positions of the pedals 45, 46, and 47, which are different for each vehicle type. Can be adjusted.
- the pedal actuator support 51 can be inserted along the longitudinal direction (vehicle width direction) of the slide rail 31 while engaging the notches 51e and 51f from both ends of the slide rail 31.
- a connector accommodating portion 51g is integrally formed so as to project forward from the base portion 51a.
- the connector accommodating portion 51g has a lower wall 51c on the base 51a side extending forward, has a front wall 51h rising upward from the front end of the lower wall 51c, and has a pair of left and right side walls 51j.
- the lower wall 51c, the front wall 51h, and the pair of side walls 51j form the connector accommodating portion 51g in a box shape having an upper surface opened upward, and the connector accommodating portion 51g is supported in the internal space of the connector accommodating portion 51g.
- Each side connector 53 is housed.
- the support-side connector 53 has the same configuration as the transmission actuator unit connector 123 and the like described above, and the terminal pieces are configured to float so as to allow some positional deviation from the mating side.
- the type is provided with a guide pin 53a and a guide sleeve 53b for guiding at the time of insertion.
- the support side connector 53 is arranged upward, that is, the guide pin 53a and the guide sleeve 53b in the insertion direction are along the vertical direction.
- a cable (not shown) is pulled out from the support side connector 53 to the rear, and this cable extends to the connection box 106 through the opening of the slide rail 31.
- the side wall 51j of the connector accommodating portion 51g is located slightly outside the side wall 51d along the side edge of the base portion 51a in the vehicle width direction. That is, there is a predetermined step between the side wall 51d and the side wall 51j, and a concave groove portion 52 along the vertical direction is formed on the side surface of the pedal actuator support 51 by utilizing this step.
- the concave groove portion 52 is formed in a shape recessed in the vehicle width direction from the surface of the side wall 51j of the connector accommodating portion 51g.
- the concave groove portion 52 is formed so as to extend downward from the upper edge of the connector accommodating portion 51g and enter the side surface of the connector accommodating portion 51g.
- the guide portion 52a relatively recessed so as to be continuous with the concave groove portion 52 is provided by the ridge portion 51ja formed by extending the side wall 51j of the connector accommodating portion 51g upward. It is configured.
- the bottom surface of the concave groove portion 52 and the bottom surface of the guide portion 52a continuous with the recessed groove portion 52 form a part of the side wall 51d of the pedal actuator support 51.
- the side surface of the ridge portion 51ja adjacent to the guide portion 52a forms a continuous guide surface 52b on the side surface of the concave groove portion 52.
- the semicircular lower notch 51f that slidably engages with the second guide surface 31b of the slide rail 31 is formed on the side wall 51j of the connector accommodating portion 51g.
- a grommet 54 which is a part of a lock mechanism 65 described later for the pedal actuator 41, is attached to the central portion of the upper wall 51b of the pedal actuator support 51.
- the grommet 54 is similar to the grommet 121 in the actuator support plate 105 and the grommet 162 in the shift actuator 134 described above, and the lock hole 54a opens forward.
- each pedal actuator 41 is detachably attached to the pedal actuator support 51, and the pedal actuator 41 is supported via the pedal actuator support bracket 61. NS.
- the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 and 33. Like the pedal actuator support 51, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is integrally molded of each part using, for example, a hard synthetic resin, and the slide rail 31 is viewed from the front (meaning a state viewed from the front of the vehicle). It has a vertically long rectangular shape with dimensions extending above and below. Basically, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 has a shape complementary to the pedal actuator support 51 so that both of them form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape when combined with the pedal actuator support 51. As shown in FIGS.
- the pedal actuator support bracket 61 overlaps the upper wall 61a that overlaps the upper wall 51b of the pedal actuator support 51 and the side wall 51d of the pedal actuator support 51, and the connector accommodating portion 51g.
- a box having a pair of left and right side walls 61b that are flush with the side wall 51j and a front wall 61c connected to the upper wall 61a and the side wall 61b, and the rear (rear surface) and the lower side (lower surface) are open. It is in shape.
- the front wall 61c is formed so as to be continuously flush with the front wall 51h of the connector accommodating portion 51g on the actuator support 51 side.
- the side wall 61b has a shape that covers the side wall 51d of the pedal actuator support 51 that is recessed in the vehicle width direction with respect to the side wall 51j of the connector accommodating portion 51g, that is, a shape corresponding to the side wall 51d.
- a substantially rectangular protrusion 55 having a shape complementary to the concave groove 52 on the pedal actuator support 51 side is formed so as to project downward.
- the upper portion of the side wall 61b is formed so as to pass above the slide rail 31 and extend rearward, and the upper portion of the side wall 61b can be fitted to the first guide surface 31a of the slide rail 31 from above.
- a semi-circular rail fitting portion 61d is notched.
- the rail fitting portion 61d has the same shape as the upper notch portion 51e of the actuator support 51.
- a lock pin 67 corresponding to the grommet 54 on the pedal actuator support 51 side is attached to the central portion of the upper wall 61a of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 that overlaps the upper wall 51b of the pedal actuator support 51.
- the lock pin 67 is located at a position corresponding to the lock hole 54a of the grommet 54 of the pedal actuator support 51, and has a knob portion 66 on the head so that the lock pin 67 can be rotated by a finger.
- the lock mechanism 65 composed of the lock pin 67 and the grommet 54 includes the lock mechanism 143 (lock pin 144, grommet 121) for fixing the transmission actuator unit 131 and the lock mechanism 154 (lock) for fixing the shift actuator 134. It has substantially the same configuration as the pin 155 and the glomet 162).
- a metal support pin 72 to which the pedal actuator 41 is connected is embedded in the upper and front corners of the pedal actuator support bracket 61, as will be described later.
- the support pin 72 is located at a position where it does not interfere with the pedal actuator support 51, and is arranged along the vehicle width direction.
- the head 72a at one end having a cylindrical surface is exposed at one corner of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 in the vehicle width direction.
- the bracket side connector 63 corresponding to the support side connector 53 of the pedal actuator support 51 is housed.
- the bracket side connector 63 is the same as each of the above-mentioned connectors, and the terminal piece is configured to be in a floating state so as to allow a slight positional deviation from the mating side, and a guide at the time of insertion is provided.
- the form is provided with a guide pin 63a and a guide sleeve 63b for performing the above.
- the bracket-side connector 63 is arranged downward so as to face the support-side connector 53.
- FIG. 34 shows a state in which the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is combined with the pedal actuator support 51.
- the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal actuator support 51 exhibit a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-like appearance. That is, the lower edge of the front wall 61c of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the upper edge of the front wall 51h of the connector accommodating portion 51g match, and the side wall 61b of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 becomes the side wall 51d of the pedal actuator support 51. Overlapping, the upper wall 61a of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 overlaps the upper wall 51b of the pedal actuator support 51.
- the outer edge of the side wall 61b of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is formed on the upper edge of the side wall 51j of the connector accommodating portion 51g of the pedal actuator support bracket 61, the periphery of the concave groove portion 52, and the side edge of the ridge portion 51ja serving as the guide portion 52a. It matches, and the upper rail fitting portion 61d is in a state of being fitted to the first guide surface 31a of the slide rail 31.
- the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal actuator support 51 are relatively tightened in the vertical direction, and both having a complementary shape are formed. It will be in a tighter and closer state. Therefore, by fastening the lock mechanism 65, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and thus the pedal actuator 41 are firmly supported by the pedal actuator support 51.
- the rail fitting portion 61d of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is attached to the first guide surface 31a of the slide rail 31 when the lock mechanism 65 is fastened and the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is pulled relatively downward. Its position and dimensions are set so that it is strongly pressed. As a result, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal actuator support 51 cannot slide along the slide rail 31, and are fixed in the vehicle width direction. In other words, the upper notch 51e and the lower notch 51f of the pedal actuator support 51 are sized so as to allow the pedal actuator support 51 to slide with respect to the slide rail 31.
- the lock mechanism 65 when the lock mechanism 65 is tightened and the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal actuator support 51 are integrated, the first and first slide rails 31 are located between the rail fitting portion 61d and the lower notch portion 51f. 2
- the dimensions of each part are set so as to tighten the guide surfaces 31a and 31b up and down. Therefore, if the pedal actuator 41 is assembled to the pedal actuator support 51 together with the pedal actuator support bracket 61, adjusted to an appropriate position along the vehicle width direction, and then the lock mechanism 65 is fastened, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal can be engaged. At the same time that the actuator support 51 is fixed to each other, the entire pedal actuator 41 is fixed to the slide rail 31.
- one lock mechanism 65 includes a lock mechanism for fixing the position of the pedal actuator 41 slidable in the vehicle width direction, and a pedal actuator support 51 and a pedal actuator support that are divided into two so as to be detachable. It has two functions, a lock mechanism for integrating the bracket 61 and the bracket 61.
- the pedal actuator 41 is previously assembled to the pedal actuator support bracket 61, and the pedal actuator 41 including the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is installed in the vehicle interior. Although it is attached to the frame 11, in the above configuration, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is temporarily held by the pedal actuator support 51, so that it can be easily assembled in a narrow vehicle interior.
- the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal actuator support 51 are combined in the vertical direction, and the operator attaches the pair of protrusions 55 of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 along the guide portion 52a on the pedal actuator support 51 side. It is fitted into the concave groove portion 52 and combined with the pedal actuator support 51 from above.
- the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is mounted on the pedal actuator support 51.
- the protrusion piece 55 enters the concave groove portion 52 from above, and at the same time, the rail fitting portion 61d on the upper portion of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 engages with the first guide surface 31a of the slide rail 31.
- the lock pin 67 of the lock mechanism 65 enters the lock hole 54a of the grommet 54 and is temporarily engaged.
- the pedal actuator 41 does not fall and is temporarily attached to the slide rail 31. It will be in a held state. Therefore, the operator can easily attach the pedal actuator 41 to the slide rail 31, that is, the frame 11 while adjusting the position of the pedal actuator 41 in a narrow vehicle interior.
- the support side connector 53 in the pedal actuator support 51 and the bracket side connector 63 in the pedal actuator support bracket 61 are connected to each other by assembling the pedal actuator support 51 and the pedal actuator support bracket 61 in the vertical direction as described above. Will be done. Both connectors 53 and 63 are aligned by fitting the guide pins 53a and 63a with the guide sleeves 53b and 63b, but preferably before the both connectors 53 and 63 come into contact with each other, that is, the guide pins 53a, The protruding length of the protruding piece 55 is set so that the tip of the protruding piece 55 is inserted into the concave groove portion 52 before the 63a and the guide sleeves 53b and 63b come into contact with each other (see FIG. 35). As a result, the guide pins 53a and 63a and the guide sleeves 53b and 63b are engaged with each other in a state where the alignment is performed to some extent, and damage to the connectors 53 and 63 is surely avoided.
- the pedal actuator 41 is also a pinion rack type linear motion actuator, and is attached to an elongated actuator housing 78 that slidably supports and accommodates a rack shaft 80 serving as an actuator rod, and a side surface of the tip of the actuator housing 78.
- the motor housing 81 is provided, and the speed reducer and the electric motor are housed in the motor housing 81. Since the required capacity of the electric motor is different for each pedal actuator 41, the size of the motor housing 81 is also different.
- the accelerator pedal actuator 41A includes a return spring 82 formed of a coil spring in parallel with the rack shaft 80.
- the brake pedal actuator 41B does not include the return spring 82, and the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B have substantially the same configuration except for this difference.
- the clutch pedal actuator 41C is different from the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B in some respects as will be described later.
- the actuator housing 78 (in other words, the rack shaft 80) has the tip side toward the pedals 45, 46, 47. It is inclined so as to be lower than the base end side near the frame 11.
- the rack shaft 80 has a rod shape with a circular cross section, and the tip portion protruding from the actuator housing 78 presses the pedals 45, 46, 47.
- a cylindrical pressing member 86 is attached to the tip of the rack shaft 80, and the pressing member 86 presses the pedals 45 and 46.
- the actuator housing 78 is attached to the pedal actuator support 51 via the pedal actuator support bracket 61, the link arm 68, the slide bracket 69, and the support arm 70 described above. It is supported.
- the slide bracket 69 supports the actuator housing 78 so as to be slidable back and forth on the lower surface side of the actuator housing 78.
- the slide bracket 69 includes a fixing screw 79 for fixing the actuator housing 78, which has been slid and adjusted in position, to the slide bracket 69. That is, a guide slit 71 is formed on the lower surface of the actuator housing 78 along the axial direction (front-back direction) of the pedal actuator 41, and the shaft portion of the fixing screw 79 penetrates the guide slit 71 and the actuator housing. It is screwed into the pad 69A located inside the 78.
- the fixing screw 79 is loosened, the pad 69A is loosened, and the slide bracket 69 and the actuator housing 78 can be relatively slidable. Then, the actuator housing 78 is fixed to the slide bracket 69 by tightening the fixing screw 79.
- the fixing screw 79 is provided with an L-shaped lever portion on the head, and can be tightened with fingers. Therefore, the front-rear position of the actuator housing 78 can be easily adjusted according to the positions of the pedals 45, 46, 47 in the vehicle.
- a cylindrical bearing portion 74 is formed at the rear end portion of the slide bracket 69, and the bearing portion 74 is formed.
- the support arms 70 are oscillatingly connected to each other. That is, the support arm 70 sandwiches the first cylindrical portion 70a rotatably fitted to the bearing portion 74, the lever portion 70b extending downward from the first cylindrical portion 70a to the slide bracket 69, and the lever portion 70b. It has a second cylindrical portion 70c extending in the axial direction, which is opposite to the first cylindrical portion 70a.
- the first cylindrical portion 70a and the second cylindrical portion 70c are configured so that their central axes coincide with each other and have the same diameter.
- the link arm 68 is a member having cylindrical shaft connecting portions at both ends, and one end portion 68a forming a cylindrical shape is swingably connected to the outer circumference of the head portion 72a of the support pin 72 in the pedal actuator support bracket 61.
- the other end portion 68b forming a cylindrical shape is swingably connected to the outer circumference of the second cylindrical portion 70c of the support arm 70.
- the link arm 68 is adjacent to the axially outer side of the lever portion 70b of the support arm 70, and the other end portion 68b of the link arm 68 is fitted to the outer periphery of the second cylindrical portion 70c.
- the central rod portion 68c is formed in a halved shape (half-split shape), and the cylindrical end portions 68a and 68b are similarly substantially C-shaped along the radius line. It is separated so that it becomes a shape.
- a fixing screw 73 is provided at the center of the rod portion 68c so as to tighten each end portion having a substantially C shape in the radial direction.
- the fixing screw 73 includes an L-shaped lever portion for tightening operation with fingers.
- each of the pair of end portions 68a and 68b of the link arm 68 is an inner shaft member (the head 72a of the support pin 72 and the second cylindrical portion which is a part of the support arm 70). It is swingable with respect to 70c). Therefore, the swing height position of the slide bracket 69 centered on the support pin 72 can be freely changed, and the support arm 70 swings freely with respect to the link arm 68.
- each of the pair of end portions 68a and 68b of the link arm 68 is an inner shaft member (head 72a of the support pin 72 and a part of the support arm 70). It is fixed to the second cylindrical portion 70c). Therefore, the angle of the link arm 68 with respect to the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is fixed, and the angle of the support arm 70 with respect to the link arm 68 is fixed.
- the first cylindrical portion 70a on the inner circumference of the bearing portion 74 of the support arm 70 is not subjected to the tightening force, and therefore the slide bracket 69 is swingably connected to the support arm 70 and the link arm 68. ing.
- the angle of the slide bracket 69 with respect to the support arm 70 and the link arm 68 (and thus the tilted posture of the pedal actuator 41) is finally arranged between the tip of the lever portion 70b of the support arm 70 and the front end portion of the slide bracket 69. It is adjusted and fixed by a variable length rod 83 using a screw mechanism (see FIG. 34).
- variable length rod 83 has a pair of screw rods 84A and 84B having threads opposite to each other, and the tips of these two screw rods 84A and 84B are screwed into the central screw hole.
- a combined adjusting nut 85 and a pair of locknuts 85A and 85B adjacent to the end faces of the adjusting nut 85 are provided.
- the base end of the screw rod 84A is swingably connected to the connecting portion 70d at the tip of the lever portion 70b, and the base end of the screw rod 84B is swingably connected to the connecting portion 69a of the front end portion of the slide bracket 69. ..
- the adjusting nut 85 and the locknuts 85A and 85B are both formed in a disk shape having irregularities around them so that they can be rotated by fingers.
- the variable length rod 83 is a mechanism similar to a so-called turnbuckle, and by combining a pair of screws in opposite directions, the total length (that is, the distance between the two connecting portions 70d and 69a) is accompanied by the rotation operation of the adjusting nut 85. ) Changes. After adjusting the angle with the adjusting nut 85, if the locknuts 85A and 85B are tightened so as to be in contact with the adjusting nut 85, careless rotation, that is, loosening of the adjusting nut 85 is restricted.
- variable length rod 83 corresponds to one side of the triangle, if the total length of the variable length rod 83 is increased, the inclination angle of the pedal actuator 41 becomes loose (that is, the tip position of the rack shaft 80 becomes high). If the total length of the variable length rod 83 is shortened, the inclination angle of the pedal actuator 41 becomes steeper (that is, the tip position of the rack shaft 80 becomes lower). Since the length of the variable length rod 83 can be continuously changed by the screw mechanism, the inclination angle of the pedal actuator 41 can also be continuously variably adjusted.
- the relative angle between the slide bracket 69 and the support arm 70 changes as the variable length rod 83 expands and contracts.
- the cylindrical base of the support arm 70 is composed of a stopper piece 75a provided on the support arm 70 side and a pair of stopper pieces 75b and 75c provided on the slide bracket 69 side so as to sandwich the stopper piece 75a.
- a stopper mechanism 75 is provided, and the stopper mechanism 75 limits the change in the angle of the slide bracket 69 with respect to the support arm 70 within a predetermined range.
- the pedal actuator 41 is detachably attached to the frame 11 of the vehicle automatic driving device 1 via the pedal actuator support bracket 61, specifically, the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator.
- the slide rail 31 adjusts the position of the pedal actuator 41 along the vehicle width direction.
- the height position on the rear end side of the pedal actuator 41 can be changed by adjusting the tilt angle of the link arm 68, and the tilt posture of the pedal actuator 41 can be changed along the plane orthogonal to the vehicle width direction by the variable length rod 83. It can be adjusted and can be adjusted in the front-rear direction via the slide bracket 69. Therefore, by combining these, it is possible to deal with different pedal positions and pedal inclinations depending on the vehicle type.
- the cable leading to the electric motor of the pedal actuator 41 is arranged through the inside of the actuator housing 78, and the end portion thereof is pulled out from the end portion of the actuator housing 78 on the link arm 68 side and then the pedal. It is connected to the bracket side connector 63 through the inside of the actuator support bracket 61.
- the pedal actuator 41 can be easily attached and detached in this way, when the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is mounted on the vehicle, the pedal actuator 41 is left removed from the frame 11 (slide rail 31), and the frame 11 is placed in the driver's seat. 2
- the pedal actuator 41 can be mounted in the vehicle after being fixed and supported on the vehicle.
- the pedal actuator 41 can be removed first, and then the frame 11 can be taken out of the vehicle.
- the vehicle automatic driving device 1 can be easily carried in and out of the vehicle through the door opening.
- the position adjustment of the pedal actuator 41 with respect to the pedals 45, 46, 47 can be easily performed in the vehicle after the pedal actuator 41 is attached to the frame 11.
- each pedal actuator support 51 that is, the lower surface of the lower wall 51c.
- Each LED light 76 is arranged so as to point diagonally downward, in other words, is configured to illuminate the vicinity of the tip of the pedal actuator 41 supported by each pedal actuator support 51.
- the LED light 76 is basically a light for being used when the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is carried into the vehicle interior to install or adjust the position of the pedal actuator 41, and is built in the connection box 106. More specifically, it operates using a capacitor as a power source. When an external power source is connected to the connection box 106 via the main connector 107, the capacitor serving as the secondary battery is automatically charged via the charging circuit inside the connection box 106. In other words, during the test operation using the vehicle automatic driving device 1, the vehicle is repeatedly charged without requiring any particular operation.
- the cable from the external power supply is generally not connected to the main connector 107.
- the LED light 76 By turning on the LED light 76 using the secondary battery, it is possible to illuminate the vicinity of the pedal in front of the driver's seat, which is the darkest, and the operability is improved.
- the light switch 109c is arranged on the display panel 109 on the upper surface of the connection box 106, and the LED light 76 is turned on / off by the light switch 109c. Since the LED light 76 is located near the support side connector 53 of the pedal actuator support 51, the wiring in the pedal actuator support 51 can be easily routed.
- FIGS. 45 to 47 show a modified example in which the height of the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator can be adjusted.
- the metal rail support bracket plate 32A having a substantially rectangular shape whose vertical dimension is larger than the vertical dimension of the slide rail 31 replaces the rail support bracket 32 described above with a slide for supporting the pedal actuator. It is provided separately from the main body portion of the rail 31.
- the rail support bracket plate 32A is attached to the front end surface of the main frame 15 in detail on the front end surface of the main beam 15a, and closes the open end of the front end of the main frame 15 (see FIGS. 46 and 47).
- the slide rail 31 is fixed to the rail support bracket plate 32A by a plurality of screws 77A.
- screw holes 77B are arranged at a plurality of locations having different height positions so that the height position (mounting position) of the rail support bracket plate 32A can be changed up and down. Therefore, the slide rail 31 can be attached and detached and the height position can be changed as needed.
- FIGS. 45 to 47 show a state in which the slide rail 31 is attached at the lowest position.
- the actuator housing 78 is supported by the pedal actuator support 51 via the pedal actuator support bracket 61, the link arm 68, the slide bracket 69, and the support arm 70.
- the main parts such as the pedal actuator support bracket 61, the link arm 68, the slide bracket 69, and the support arm 70 are the same as those of the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B.
- a sleeve (not shown) is interposed between the inner peripheral surface of one end portion 68a of the link arm 68 and the head portion 72a of the support pin 72 of the pedal actuator support bracket 61. Therefore, even if the fixing screw 73 of the link arm 68 is tightened, the link arm 68 is not fixed to the support pin 72 and maintains a swingable state with respect to the support pin 72. That is, in the clutch pedal actuator 41C, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the link arm 68 are swingably connected to each other. At the other end 68b of the link arm 68, the support arm 70 is fixed as described above by tightening the fixing screw 73. That is, the angle between the link arm 68 and the lever portion 70b is fixed to be constant.
- a fixed length rod member 88 is attached between the connecting portion 70d at the tip of the lever portion 70b and the connecting portion 69a of the slide bracket 69 instead of the variable length rod 83 described above. Has been done. As a result, the angular relationship between the support arm 70 and the slide bracket 69 and thus the actuator housing 78 is always constant.
- the clutch pedal actuator 41C is supported so as to be swingable around the support pin 72 of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 as a whole. Further, the position of the other end 68b of the link arm 68, that is, the position of the connection point between the link arm 68 and the actuator housing 78 (mainly the height position) can be changed by the adjustment via the fixing screw 73.
- the main parts such as the link arm 68 are shared with the other two pedal actuators 41A and 41B.
- the second difference is that the clutch pedal actuator 41C is provided with a swing plate 87 at the tip of the rack shaft 80 instead of the above-mentioned pressing member 86. That is, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 5, a swing plate 87 is swingably attached to the tip of the rack shaft 80.
- the swing plate 87 is arranged so as to be overlapped with the pedal portion of the clutch pedal 47, and is fixed to the pedal portion by an appropriate jig or fixture (not shown).
- the swing plate 87 is swingably supported by a pin 87a so as to have a rotation center axis along the vehicle width direction.
- the inclination of the pedal surface changes relatively greatly with the stroke (depression) of the clutch pedal 47. Specifically, when the pedal is not depressed, the pedal surface is directed diagonally upward, and when the clutch pedal 47 is depressed, the pedal surface becomes almost vertical, and in a more extreme case, the pedal surface is oblique. It turns downward.
- the clutch pedal actuator 41C of the above embodiment since the swing plate 87 at the tip is fixed to the pedal portion, the clutch pedal actuator 41C reliably holds the pedal portion regardless of the change in the angle of the pedal surface. It can be pressed.
- the height position of the pedal portion changes with the swing around the lever pin on the upper part of the clutch pedal 47, and this change allows the link arm 68 and the pedal actuator support bracket 61 to swing freely. It is absorbed by being. By allowing the actuator housing 78 to freely change its angle, the rack shaft 80 can reliably press the pedal portion to the stroke limit.
- the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B press the accelerator pedal 45 and the brake pedal 46 in a linear motion
- the clutch pedal actuator 41C presses the clutch pedal 47 while swinging.
- the actuator housing 78 is supported from below by the pedal actuator support bracket 61 via the slide bracket 69 and the link arm 68, and the extension line of the rack shaft 80 passes above the pedal actuator support bracket 61. .. Therefore, the direction of load acting on the swinging pedal portion becomes appropriate, and the motor housing 81 protruding downward from the actuator housing 78 does not excessively lower during the stroke, so that interference with the vehicle body floor 6 is unlikely to occur.
- the height position of the slide rail 31 that supports the pedal actuator 41 can be lowered, and as shown in FIG. 2 and the like, the slide rail 31 is arranged at a height position near the front end of the seat cushion 3. Is possible. This point is the same in the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B.
- the three pedal actuators 41 may have the same configuration.
- the pedal actuator 41 can be attached to the frame 11 in the vehicle interior after the frame 11 is carried into the vehicle interior.
- the pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41 may be attached except for the clutch pedal actuator 41C.
- the mode of the vehicle automatic driving device 1 used for the automatic transmission type vehicle can be adopted.
- the pedal actuator 41 can be easily attached and detached, so even if the vehicle under test in the chassis dynamometer is changed from a manual transmission type vehicle to an automatic transmission type vehicle, it can be handled. It's easy.
- the pedal actuator support 51 is slidably supported by the actuator support slide rails 31 attached to the front end faces of the pair of main beams 15a of the main frame 15.
- the pedal actuator 41 is supported by the pedal actuator support 51 via the pedal actuator support bracket 61.
- An LED light 76 as a light is provided on the lower surface of the pedal actuator support 51 so as to illuminate the front surface. That is, the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is provided with a frame 11 mounted on the driver's seat of the vehicle, a pedal actuator 41 detachably attached to the front end portion of the frame 11, and a front end portion of the frame 11 so as to illuminate the front. It is equipped with an LED light 76.
- the vehicle automatic driving device 1 Since the vehicle automatic driving device 1 has an LED light 76 that illuminates the front at the front end of the frame 11, the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is used when the pedal actuator 41 is attached or the position of the pedal actuator 41 is adjusted. The workability of the installation work can be improved.
- the secondary battery that serves as the power source for the LED light 76 is built in the connection box 106 of the frame 11.
- the connection box 106 is arranged so as to be embedded in the connection box support portion 16c of the subframe 16 constituting the frame 11.
- the secondary battery that serves as the power source for the LED light 76 is built in the frame 11. That is, the vehicle automatic driving device 1 serves as a power source for the LED light 76, and includes a secondary battery built in the frame 11 and charged while the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is connected to an external power source.
- the LED light 76 Since the secondary battery is charged in the vehicle automatic driving device 1 without any particular operation during the test operation using the vehicle automatic driving device 1, the LED light 76 should be turned on in a state where it is not connected to an external power source. Is possible.
- the power source of the LED light 76 may be, for example, a capacitor such as a lithium capacitor or a lithium ion battery.
- the LED light 76 illuminates the front of the front end of the frame 11 in the vehicle automatic driving device 1, the amount of electric power consumed by the secondary battery when illuminating the front of the front end of the frame 11 can be reduced, and an external power source can be used.
- the LED light 76 can be turned on for a long time without being connected to.
- the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is provided with a plurality of pedal actuators 41, and LED lights 76 are provided in each portion of the frame 11 to which each pedal actuator 41 is attached.
- a plurality of LED lights 76 are arranged at the attachment portion of the pedal actuator 41 in the frame 11 corresponding to the plurality of pedal actuators 41 individually.
- the vehicle automatic driving device 1 can illuminate the front of the front end portion of the frame 11 with the LED light 76 for each pedal actuator 41 in the vehicle interior.
- the LED light 76 is arranged so as to point diagonally downward on the lower surface of the pedal actuator support 51 so that the vicinity of the pedal in front of the driver's seat is illuminated. That is, the LED light 76 is arranged obliquely downward on the lower surface of the front end portion of the frame 11.
- the vehicle automatic driving device 1 can illuminate the vicinity of the darkest pedal in front of the driver's seat (near the tip of the pedal actuator 41) by turning on the LED light 76. Therefore, the workability (operability) at the time of the work of installing the vehicle automatic driving device 1 in the vehicle interior can be improved.
- a connection box 106 is embedded in the connection box support portion 16c of the subframe 16. Further, a light switch 109c for turning on / off the LED light 76 is arranged on the display panel 109 on the upper surface of the connection box 106. That is, a connection box 106 is provided at the front of the frame 11 to form a connection with a cable drawn from the outside of the vehicle into the vehicle, and a light switch 109c of the LED light 76 is arranged on the upper surface of the connection box 106. ing.
- the light switch 109c is arranged on the upper surface of the connection box 106, the operability of the on / off operation of the LED light 76 is improved.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Seats For Vehicles (AREA)
Abstract
A vehicle automatic driving device (1) comprises: a frame (11) installed at a driver seat of a vehicle; a pedal actuator (41) detachably attached to a front end part of the frame (11); an LED light (76) provided at the front end part of the frame (11) to illuminate the forward area; and a secondary battery which is a power supply for the LED light (76), and is built in the frame (11) and charged while connected to an external power supply. With lighting of the LED light (76), the vehicle automatic driving device (1) can improve operationality of an operation for installing the vehicle automatic driving device (1) during an attachment operation of the pedal actuator (41), a position adjustment operation of the pedal actuator (41), and the like.
Description
本発明は、車両自動運転装置に関する。
The present invention relates to an automatic vehicle driving device.
シャシダイナモメータ上で車両の走行試験を行うに際しては、一般に、車両のペダル操作やシフトレバー操作を運転者に代わって行う車両自動運転装置が用いられる。
When conducting a vehicle running test on a chassis dynamometer, a vehicle automatic driving device that performs pedal operation and shift lever operation of the vehicle on behalf of the driver is generally used.
例えば、特許文献1においては、ペダルアクチュエータによって車両のペダルが押圧する車両自動運転装置が開示されている。
For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a vehicle automatic driving device in which a pedal of a vehicle is pressed by a pedal actuator.
特許文献1の車両自動運転装置は、アクセルペダル等の車両のペダルに対してペダルアクチュエータの位置調整を行っている。
The vehicle automatic driving device of Patent Document 1 adjusts the position of the pedal actuator with respect to the pedal of the vehicle such as the accelerator pedal.
しかしながら、特許文献1の車両自動運転装置は、ペダルアクチュエータが配置される車室内下部の空間が暗くなるため、ペダルアクチュエータの位置調整等の設置作業の作業性が悪くなる虞がある。
However, in the vehicle automatic driving device of Patent Document 1, since the space in the lower part of the vehicle interior where the pedal actuator is arranged becomes dark, there is a possibility that the workability of the installation work such as the position adjustment of the pedal actuator deteriorates.
本発明の車両自動運転装置は、車両の運転席に搭載されるフレームと、上記フレームの前端部に着脱可能に取り付けられるペダルアクチュエータと、上記フレームの前端部に前方を照らすように設けられたライトと、上記ライトの電源であり、上記フレームに内蔵され、外部電源に接続されている間に充電される二次電池と、を備える。
The vehicle automatic driving device of the present invention includes a frame mounted on the driver's seat of the vehicle, a pedal actuator detachably attached to the front end portion of the frame, and a light provided on the front end portion of the frame so as to illuminate the front. A secondary battery that is a power source for the light, is built in the frame, and is charged while connected to an external power source.
好ましい一つの態様では、上記ライトがLEDライトから構成される。
In one preferred embodiment, the light is composed of an LED light.
好ましい一つの態様では、上記二次電池は、キャパシタである。
In one preferred embodiment, the secondary battery is a capacitor.
好ましい一つの態様では、上記ペダルアクチュエータを複数備え、上記フレームの各ペダルアクチュエータが取り付けられる部分のそれぞれに上記ライトが設けられている。
In one preferred embodiment, a plurality of the pedal actuators are provided, and the lights are provided in each of the portions of the frame to which the pedal actuators are attached.
好ましい一つの態様では、上記ライトは、上記フレームの前端部の下面において、斜め下方へ向かって配置されている。
In one preferred embodiment, the light is arranged diagonally downward on the lower surface of the front end of the frame.
好ましい一つの態様では、上記フレームの前部に車両外部から車両内に引き込まれるケーブルとの接続部を構成する接続ボックスが設けられており、この接続ボックスの上面に上記ライトのスイッチが配置されている。
In one preferred embodiment, a connection box is provided at the front of the frame to form a connection with a cable that is pulled into the vehicle from the outside of the vehicle, and a switch for the light is arranged on the upper surface of the connection box. There is.
本発明の車両自動運転装置は、フレームの前端部の前方を照らすライトを有しているので、ライトを点灯することにより、ペダルアクチュエータの位置調整作業時等の車両自動運転装置の設置作業の作業性を向上させることができる。
Since the vehicle automatic driving device of the present invention has a light that illuminates the front of the front end portion of the frame, by turning on the light, the work of installing the vehicle automatic driving device such as when adjusting the position of the pedal actuator is performed. The sex can be improved.
以下、この発明の一実施例を図面に基づいて詳細に説明する。
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[車両自動運転装置1の全体構成]
図1~図4は、この発明に係る車両自動運転装置1を車両の運転席2に搭載した状態で示している。図5~図9は、車両から取り外した状態で車両自動運転装置1の全体を示している。この車両自動運転装置1は、図示しないシャシダイナモメータ上で車両の走行試験を行う際に用いられるもので、車両外部に配置される制御装置からの信号によりアクセルペダル等のペダル操作と変速機のシフトレバー操作を行う。 [Overall configuration of vehicle automatic driving device 1]
1 to 4 show a state in which the vehicleautomatic driving device 1 according to the present invention is mounted on the driver's seat 2 of the vehicle. 5 to 9 show the entire vehicle automatic driving device 1 in a state of being removed from the vehicle. This vehicle automatic driving device 1 is used when a running test of a vehicle is performed on a chassis dynamometer (not shown), and a pedal operation such as an accelerator pedal and a transmission of a transmission are performed by a signal from a control device arranged outside the vehicle. Operate the shift lever.
図1~図4は、この発明に係る車両自動運転装置1を車両の運転席2に搭載した状態で示している。図5~図9は、車両から取り外した状態で車両自動運転装置1の全体を示している。この車両自動運転装置1は、図示しないシャシダイナモメータ上で車両の走行試験を行う際に用いられるもので、車両外部に配置される制御装置からの信号によりアクセルペダル等のペダル操作と変速機のシフトレバー操作を行う。 [Overall configuration of vehicle automatic driving device 1]
1 to 4 show a state in which the vehicle
ここで、本実施例の車両自動運転装置1は、後述するように、クラッチペダルを有する手動変速機型の車両であってもクラッチペダルを具備しない自動変速機型の車両であっても使用が可能であり、さらに、運転席が車両右側にあり左手でシフトレバー操作を行ういわゆる右ハンドル車と、運転席が車両左側にあり右手でシフトレバー操作を行ういわゆる左ハンドル車と、の双方に適用が可能である。図1~図9に示した実施例は、特に、アクセルペダル45とブレーキペダル46とクラッチペダル47とを備えた手動変速機型の車両で、かつ右ハンドル車に適用される態様とした構成例の車両自動運転装置1を示している。
Here, the vehicle automatic driving device 1 of the present embodiment can be used regardless of whether the vehicle is a manual transmission type vehicle having a clutch pedal or an automatic transmission type vehicle not provided with the clutch pedal, as will be described later. It is possible, and it is applicable to both so-called right-hand drive vehicles with the driver's seat on the right side of the vehicle and the shift lever is operated with the left hand, and so-called left-handle vehicles with the driver's seat on the left side of the vehicle and the shift lever is operated with the right hand. Is possible. The embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 9 is a configuration example in which the vehicle is a manual transmission type vehicle including an accelerator pedal 45, a brake pedal 46, and a clutch pedal 47, and is applied to a right-hand steering wheel vehicle. The vehicle automatic driving device 1 of the above is shown.
運転席2は、車両の車体フロア6(図2参照)の上に、図示しない前後スライド機構や上下昇降機構を介して支持されており、運転者が座る座面を構成するシートクッション3と、運転者の背中を支持するシートバック4と、運転者の頭部を支持するヘッドレスト5と、を備えている。なお、一般にシートバック4はシートクッション3に対する傾斜角度を調整可能ないわゆるリクライニング機構を備えている。
The driver's seat 2 is supported on the vehicle body floor 6 (see FIG. 2) via a front-rear slide mechanism and a vertical lift mechanism (not shown), and includes a seat cushion 3 constituting a seat surface on which the driver sits. It includes a seat back 4 that supports the driver's back and a headrest 5 that supports the driver's head. In general, the seat back 4 is provided with a so-called reclining mechanism capable of adjusting the inclination angle with respect to the seat cushion 3.
車両自動運転装置1は、シートバック4の上端部付近から車両前方へ向けて斜め下方へ延びるフレーム11と、フレーム11前端においてシートクッション3前端に沿うように下方へ延びた一対の脚部12と、フレーム11前端から車両前方へ延びて3つのペダル45,46,47をそれぞれ操作する3つのペダルアクチュエータ41と、フレーム11の中間部においてシートクッション3ならびにシートバック4から浮き上がった状態に支持された可動ユニット101と、可動ユニット101の上面に搭載されたトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131と、フレーム11の前端部に位置する接続ボックス106と、から概略構成されている。
The vehicle automatic driving device 1 includes a frame 11 extending diagonally downward from the vicinity of the upper end portion of the seat back 4 toward the front of the vehicle, and a pair of leg portions 12 extending downward along the front end of the seat cushion 3 at the front end of the frame 11. , Three pedal actuators 41 extending from the front end of the frame 11 to the front of the vehicle to operate the three pedals 45, 46, 47, respectively, and being supported in a state of being lifted from the seat cushion 3 and the seat back 4 in the middle portion of the frame 11. It is roughly composed of a movable unit 101, a transmission actuator unit 131 mounted on the upper surface of the movable unit 101, and a connection box 106 located at the front end of the frame 11.
ペダルアクチュエータ41としては、詳しくは、アクセルペダル45を操作するアクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aと、ブレーキペダル46を操作するブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bと、クラッチペダル47を操作するクラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cと、を含んでいる(図5、図31参照)。これら3つのペダルアクチュエータ41は、完全に同一の構成であってもよいが、本実施例では、クラッチペダル47が弧を描くように動作し、かつストローク(踏込操作量)が比較的大きいことを考慮して、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cが細部において他の2つのペダルアクチュエータ41A,41Bとは異なる構成となっている。アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aとブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bは、実質的に同一の構成を有している。なお、基本的な構成は、3つのペダルアクチュエータ41に共通であるので、特に区別する必要のないときは、ペダルアクチュエータ41と総称する。
Specifically, the pedal actuator 41 includes an accelerator pedal actuator 41A for operating the accelerator pedal 45, a brake pedal actuator 41B for operating the brake pedal 46, and a clutch pedal actuator 41C for operating the clutch pedal 47 (). 5 and 31). These three pedal actuators 41 may have completely the same configuration, but in this embodiment, the clutch pedal 47 operates in an arc and the stroke (stepping operation amount) is relatively large. In consideration, the clutch pedal actuator 41C has a configuration different from that of the other two pedal actuators 41A and 41B in detail. The accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B have substantially the same configuration. Since the basic configuration is common to the three pedal actuators 41, they are collectively referred to as the pedal actuator 41 when it is not necessary to distinguish them.
接続ボックス106は、車両自動運転装置1が具備する種々のアクチュエータ類やセンサ類と車両外部の制御装置から車両内に引き込まれる図示しないケーブル(電源系統と信号系統とを含む)との接続部を構成している。
The connection box 106 provides a connection portion between various actuators and sensors included in the vehicle automatic driving device 1 and a cable (including a power supply system and a signal system) (not shown) drawn into the vehicle from a control device outside the vehicle. It is configured.
可動ユニット101は、フレーム11に対して前後方向にスライド可能となるように構成されており、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の支持台として機能する。この可動ユニット101と接続ボックス106とは、可撓性を有する平帯状のケーブル100を介して電気的に接続されている。このケーブル100は、複数本の電線を金属チェーンに類似した可撓性の保護部材によって保護した構成であり、U字形ないしJ字形に湾曲することで、可動ユニット101のスライド位置に拘わらず両者の接続が可能となっている。
The movable unit 101 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the frame 11, and functions as a support base for the transmission actuator unit 131. The movable unit 101 and the connection box 106 are electrically connected to each other via a flexible flat band-shaped cable 100. The cable 100 has a configuration in which a plurality of electric wires are protected by a flexible protective member similar to a metal chain, and by bending in a U-shape or a J-shape, both of them are formed regardless of the slide position of the movable unit 101. Connection is possible.
トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131は、図示例では運転席2の左手側に位置するシフトレバーを操作するものであり、シフトレバーを車両幅方向に沿って操作(いわゆるセレクト操作)するセレクト用アクチュエータ133と、シフトレバーを車両前後方向に沿って操作(いわゆるシフト操作)するシフト用アクチュエータ134と、を組み合わせた構成となっている。詳しくは、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131は、図示しないシフトレバー頭部の例えば略球形状をなすノブないしグリップを把持するグリップハンド168を備えており、このグリップハンド168がシフト用アクチュエータ134の動作によって前後進するとともに、シフト用アクチュエータ134全体がセレクト用アクチュエータ133の動作によって車両幅方向に沿って移動することで、セレクト操作およびシフト操作の双方を実現する。
In the illustrated example, the transmission actuator unit 131 operates a shift lever located on the left hand side of the driver's seat 2, and has a select actuator 133 that operates the shift lever along the vehicle width direction (so-called select operation) and a shift. The structure is a combination of a shift actuator 134 that operates the lever along the front-rear direction of the vehicle (so-called shift operation). Specifically, the transmission actuator unit 131 includes a grip hand 168 for gripping, for example, a substantially spherical knob or grip of a shift lever head (not shown), and the grip hand 168 moves forward and backward by the operation of the shift actuator 134. At the same time, the entire shift actuator 134 moves along the vehicle width direction by the operation of the select actuator 133, thereby realizing both the select operation and the shift operation.
車両の運転席2に搭載された車両自動運転装置1は、運転席2の左右両側でベルト25を介して後方斜め下方へ引っ張ることにより車両に固定される。詳しくは、運転席2を傷等から保護するために、剛性を有するシートサポート27がシートクッション3後端に配置されており、左右に細長い形状をなすリング部29の両端にベルト25が掛けられている。シートサポート27は、シートクッション3後端からシートバック4下端に亘って略L字形に延びるプレート部28を備えており、運転席2の後方(つまり車両の後席側)から運転席2の下面に沿ってプレート部28を挿入するようにして取り付けられる(図2参照)。なお、ベルト25は、図示しない汎用のベルト締付器(いわゆる荷締め器)を介して左右のそれぞれでループ状に構成されており、このベルト締付器によって締付操作がなされる。後述するように、ベルト25を介して締付・固定した状態において、脚部12の下端が車体フロア6に当接し、フレーム11の上端がシートバック4上部に当接する。
The vehicle automatic driving device 1 mounted on the driver's seat 2 of the vehicle is fixed to the vehicle by pulling it diagonally backward and downward via the belt 25 on both the left and right sides of the driver's seat 2. Specifically, in order to protect the driver's seat 2 from scratches and the like, a rigid seat support 27 is arranged at the rear end of the seat cushion 3, and belts 25 are hung on both ends of the ring portion 29 having an elongated shape on the left and right. ing. The seat support 27 includes a plate portion 28 extending in a substantially L shape from the rear end of the seat cushion 3 to the lower end of the seat back 4, and the lower surface of the driver's seat 2 is provided from the rear of the driver's seat 2 (that is, the rear seat side of the vehicle). The plate portion 28 is attached so as to be inserted along the above (see FIG. 2). The belt 25 is configured in a loop shape on each of the left and right sides via a general-purpose belt tightener (so-called load tightener) (not shown), and the tightening operation is performed by the belt tightener. As will be described later, in a state of being tightened and fixed via the belt 25, the lower end of the leg portion 12 abuts on the vehicle body floor 6, and the upper end of the frame 11 abuts on the upper portion of the seat back 4.
次に、車両自動運転装置1を構成する各部をより詳細に説明する。
Next, each part constituting the vehicle automatic driving device 1 will be described in more detail.
[フレーム11・脚部12の構成]
図10~図12は、フレーム11および脚部12の構成を示している。フレーム11は、例えば炭素繊維強化プラスチック(CFRP)を用いて中空管状に構成したものであり、メインフレーム15と、サブフレーム16と、を備えており、両者が一体に構成されている。詳しくは、いくつかの部分に区分して成形したものを互いに接合して一体化してある。 [Structure offrame 11 and leg 12]
10 to 12 show the configuration of theframe 11 and the leg portion 12. The frame 11 is formed in a hollow tubular shape using, for example, carbon fiber reinforced plastic (CFRP), and includes a main frame 15 and a subframe 16, both of which are integrally formed. More specifically, it is divided into several parts and molded and joined to each other to be integrated.
図10~図12は、フレーム11および脚部12の構成を示している。フレーム11は、例えば炭素繊維強化プラスチック(CFRP)を用いて中空管状に構成したものであり、メインフレーム15と、サブフレーム16と、を備えており、両者が一体に構成されている。詳しくは、いくつかの部分に区分して成形したものを互いに接合して一体化してある。 [Structure of
10 to 12 show the configuration of the
メインフレーム15は、平面視(図5のように車両上方から見た状態をいう)において略U字形をなす。つまり、メインフレーム15は、車両前後方向に斜めに延びる一対のメインビーム15aと、これら一対のメインビーム15aの上端を互いに連結する上下に拡がった帯状をなす水平方向に沿った横ビーム15bと、を有する。車両搭載状態では、横ビーム15bがシートバック4の上部に当接し、ここからメインビーム15aがシートクッション3前端へ向かって斜め下方へ直線的に延びた姿勢となる。
The main frame 15 has a substantially U shape in a plan view (meaning a state viewed from above the vehicle as shown in FIG. 5). That is, the main frame 15 includes a pair of main beams 15a extending diagonally in the front-rear direction of the vehicle, and a horizontal beam 15b along the horizontal direction extending vertically to connect the upper ends of the pair of main beams 15a to each other. Has. In the vehicle-mounted state, the lateral beam 15b abuts on the upper portion of the seat back 4, and the main beam 15a extends diagonally downward and linearly toward the front end of the seat cushion 3.
メインビーム15aは、矩形断面を有し、上下方向の寸法が長手方向(車両前後方向)の中央部で比較的小さく、後端部で上下方向に拡がって横ビーム15bに段差なく連続している。上下方向の寸法は、脚部12が取り付けられる前端部で中央部よりも僅かに拡大している。
The main beam 15a has a rectangular cross section, and the vertical dimension is relatively small at the central portion in the longitudinal direction (vehicle front-rear direction), extends in the vertical direction at the rear end portion, and is continuous with the lateral beam 15b without a step. .. The vertical dimension is slightly larger than the central portion at the front end to which the leg 12 is attached.
また、矩形断面の幅方向寸法は、後端部から中央部に至る範囲では概ね一定である。そして、中央部から前端部へ向かって矩形断面の幅方向寸法が徐々に拡大する。脚部12が取り付けられる前端部においては、脚部12の取付部を構成するように矩形断面の幅方向の寸法が脚部12の投影面積に比較して十分に大きくなっており、かつ、サブフレーム16に連続するように互いに内側へ張り出している。
In addition, the widthwise dimension of the rectangular cross section is generally constant in the range from the rear end to the center. Then, the widthwise dimension of the rectangular cross section gradually expands from the central portion to the front end portion. At the front end to which the leg 12 is attached, the dimension in the width direction of the rectangular cross section is sufficiently larger than the projected area of the leg 12 so as to form the attachment portion of the leg 12, and the sub They project inward to each other so as to be continuous with the frame 16.
一対のメインビーム15aは、互いに対称形状をなしている。ここで、メインフレーム15の平面視においては、図5に示すように、全体として樽型をなすように各々のメインビーム15aがアーチ状に湾曲している。換言すれば、一対のメインビーム15aの間の間隔が、車両前後方向の中央部付近で大きくなっており、後端部(横ビーム15b)および前端部での間隔は中央部に比較して小さくなっている。
The pair of main beams 15a have symmetrical shapes. Here, in the plan view of the main frame 15, as shown in FIG. 5, each main beam 15a is curved in an arch shape so as to form a barrel shape as a whole. In other words, the distance between the pair of main beams 15a is large near the center in the front-rear direction of the vehicle, and the distance between the rear end (lateral beam 15b) and the front end is smaller than that at the center. It has become.
また側面視においては、メインビーム15aは完全な直線状ではなく、シートバック4とシートクッション3とがなす形状に相対的に近付くように、アーチ状に緩く湾曲している(図11参照)。
In the side view, the main beam 15a is not a perfect straight line, but is gently curved in an arch shape so as to be relatively close to the shape formed by the seat back 4 and the seat cushion 3 (see FIG. 11).
一対のメインビーム15aの中央部の上面には、帯状をなすベルト25が通るベルトループ26がそれぞれ取り付けられている。ベルトループ26は、偏平なU字形をなす金属部材からなり、メインビーム15aの表面との間に生じる隙間を通してベルト25がメインビーム15aに装着される。メインビーム15aの中で、このベルトループ26が位置する中央部が最も細く(メインビーム15aの周囲長が短い)なっており、かつ一対のメインビーム15aの間隔が最も広い。このようにベルト25が装着される箇所で一対のメインビーム15aが幅方向外側へ膨らんでいることで、図2に示すように、車両搭載状態においてシートサポート27から延びるベルト25がシートクッション3等と干渉することなく比較的真っ直ぐに(つまり車両前後方向に対し傾かずに)配置されることとなる。従って、ベルト25がシートクッション3やシートバック4の側縁に食い込んでしまうことがなく、シートクッション3やシートバック4の損傷が抑制される。なお、一実施例では、ベルト25の装着位置の調整が可能なように、複数個のベルトループ26が直列に並んで配置されている。
A belt loop 26 through which a belt-shaped belt 25 passes is attached to the upper surface of the central portion of the pair of main beams 15a. The belt loop 26 is made of a flat U-shaped metal member, and the belt 25 is attached to the main beam 15a through a gap formed between the belt loop 26 and the surface of the main beam 15a. Among the main beams 15a, the central portion where the belt loop 26 is located is the thinnest (the peripheral length of the main beam 15a is short), and the distance between the pair of main beams 15a is the widest. Since the pair of main beams 15a bulge outward in the width direction at the place where the belt 25 is mounted, the belt 25 extending from the seat support 27 in the vehicle mounted state is the seat cushion 3 and the like, as shown in FIG. It will be arranged relatively straight (that is, without tilting in the front-rear direction of the vehicle) without interfering with the vehicle. Therefore, the belt 25 does not bite into the side edges of the seat cushion 3 and the seat back 4, and damage to the seat cushion 3 and the seat back 4 is suppressed. In one embodiment, a plurality of belt loops 26 are arranged side by side in series so that the mounting position of the belt 25 can be adjusted.
メインフレーム15の横ビーム15bは、シートバック4の基本的な傾斜角に沿うように僅かに傾いた略長方形の板状をなしており、車両搭載状態においてシートバック4の上端部付近に当接するシートバック当接部を構成している。シートバック4の傾斜をリクライニング機構により適宜に調整することで、横ビーム15bの略長方形をなす外側面がシートバック4に広く面接触する。ここで、シートバック4に当接するフレーム11の肩部つまり横ビーム15bの上縁両端部(メインビーム15aに連なるコーナ部)の表面には、適宜な弾性を有するエラストマからなるラバー部30がそれぞれ設けられている。
The lateral beam 15b of the main frame 15 has a substantially rectangular plate shape slightly inclined along the basic inclination angle of the seat back 4, and abuts near the upper end of the seat back 4 when mounted on a vehicle. It constitutes the seat back contact portion. By appropriately adjusting the inclination of the seat back 4 by the reclining mechanism, the substantially rectangular outer surface of the lateral beam 15b comes into wide surface contact with the seat back 4. Here, on the shoulder portion of the frame 11 that abuts on the seat back 4, that is, on the surface of both upper edge portions (corner portions connected to the main beam 15a) of the lateral beam 15b, rubber portions 30 made of an elastomer having appropriate elasticity are respectively. It is provided.
ペダルアクチュエータ41やシフト用アクチュエータ134の作動に伴う前後方向の反力がフレーム11に作用したときに、フレーム11の後端となる両肩部がシートバック4に強く圧接するが、この部分に弾性を有するラバー部30を備えることで、シートバック4の損傷が抑制される。さらにこのラバー部30は、シートバック4の表皮に対する滑り止めとしても機能する。ラバー部30は、例えばフレーム11の最終的な成形時に同時に貼着することができるが、後工程で接着するようにしてもよい。
When a reaction force in the front-rear direction due to the operation of the pedal actuator 41 and the shift actuator 134 acts on the frame 11, both shoulders, which are the rear ends of the frame 11, are strongly pressed against the seat back 4, but this portion is elastic. By providing the rubber portion 30 having the above, damage to the seat back 4 is suppressed. Further, the rubber portion 30 also functions as a non-slip for the skin of the seat back 4. The rubber portion 30 can be attached at the same time, for example, at the time of final molding of the frame 11, but it may be attached in a later step.
また、シートバック4は、一般に、内部の材質(ひいては硬度)が互いに異なる上部パッド部4aと下部パッド部4bとを有しているが、両者の境界となる表皮の縫い目4cに概ね沿って横ビーム15bの下縁(つまりシートバック当接部の下縁)が位置するように、メインフレーム15の各部の基本的な寸法が設定されている(図12参照)。シートバック4の具体的な構成は、勿論車種によって異なるが、多くの場合、上部パッド部4aと下部パッド部4bとの境界の位置は概ね一定である。縫い目4cは相対的に窪んでいるので、この縫い目4cの位置にメインフレーム15の横ビーム15bを合わせて車両に搭載することで、車両自動運転装置1の位置決めが容易になるとともに、フレーム11の姿勢が安定する。なお、車種によっては、このような縫い目4cの位置と無関係に車両自動運転装置1を搭載することも勿論可能である。
Further, the seat back 4 generally has an upper pad portion 4a and a lower pad portion 4b whose internal materials (and thus hardness) are different from each other, but the seat back 4 is laterally substantially along the seam 4c of the epidermis which is the boundary between the two. The basic dimensions of each part of the main frame 15 are set so that the lower edge of the beam 15b (that is, the lower edge of the seat back contact portion) is located (see FIG. 12). Of course, the specific configuration of the seat back 4 differs depending on the vehicle type, but in many cases, the position of the boundary between the upper pad portion 4a and the lower pad portion 4b is substantially constant. Since the seam 4c is relatively recessed, by aligning the lateral beam 15b of the main frame 15 with the position of the seam 4c and mounting it on the vehicle, the vehicle automatic driving device 1 can be easily positioned and the frame 11 can be positioned. The posture is stable. It should be noted that, depending on the vehicle type, it is of course possible to mount the vehicle automatic driving device 1 regardless of the position of such a seam 4c.
サブフレーム16は、上述したように樽型をなすように膨らんだメインフレーム15の内側に位置している。サブフレーム16は、平面視において全体として略U字形をなしており、互いに平行に位置する一対の直線状をなすサブビーム16aと、これら一対のサブビーム16aの下端を互いに連結する中空プレート状の横ビーム16bと、横ビーム16bの下端から折れ曲がった形で前方へ延びる接続ボックス支持部16cと、を有する。
The subframe 16 is located inside the main frame 15 that swells in a barrel shape as described above. The subframe 16 has a substantially U-shape as a whole in a plan view, and a pair of linear subbeams 16a located parallel to each other and a hollow plate-shaped lateral beam connecting the lower ends of the pair of subbeams 16a to each other. It has a connection box support portion 16b that extends forward in a bent shape from the lower end of the lateral beam 16b.
一対のサブビーム16aと横ビーム16bとは、メインフレーム15の傾斜に対応した一つの傾斜した平面に沿って延びている。換言すれば、傾斜した帯状ないし細長い長方形の母材からU字形の切欠部を切り取ったかのような形に一対のサブビーム16aと横ビーム16bとが形成されている。サブビーム16aは、それぞれ正方形に近い矩形断面を有している。このような傾斜したサブビーム16aおよび横ビーム16bに対し、接続ボックス支持部16cは、車両搭載状態において水平面に沿ったものとなるように形成されている。従って、サブビーム16aおよび横ビーム16bと、接続ボックス支持部16cとは、所定の角度を有して連続している。
The pair of sub-beams 16a and lateral beams 16b extend along one inclined plane corresponding to the inclination of the main frame 15. In other words, a pair of sub-beams 16a and lateral beams 16b are formed as if a U-shaped notch was cut out from an inclined strip-shaped or elongated rectangular base material. Each of the subbeams 16a has a rectangular cross section close to a square. With respect to such an inclined sub-beam 16a and lateral beam 16b, the connection box support portion 16c is formed so as to be along a horizontal plane in a vehicle-mounted state. Therefore, the sub-beam 16a and the lateral beam 16b and the connection box support portion 16c are continuous with a predetermined angle.
水平面に沿った配置となる接続ボックス支持部16cは、メインフレーム15の一対のメインビーム15aの前端部の間に挟まれて位置し、かつ互いに一体化されている。つまり、平面視において略U字形をなすメインフレーム15は、接続ボックス支持部16cを介して閉構造に構成されている。また、サブビーム16aの後端(つまり上端)は、メインフレーム15の横ビーム15bの下縁内側面に接続されている。なお、メインフレーム15とサブフレーム16とは、前述したように、例えば炭素繊維強化プラスチック(CFRP)を用いた成形品として一体化されている。
The connection box support portion 16c arranged along the horizontal plane is located between the front ends of the pair of main beams 15a of the main frame 15 and is integrated with each other. That is, the main frame 15 having a substantially U shape in a plan view is configured to have a closed structure via the connection box support portion 16c. Further, the rear end (that is, the upper end) of the sub beam 16a is connected to the inner side surface of the lower edge of the lateral beam 15b of the main frame 15. As described above, the main frame 15 and the subframe 16 are integrated as a molded product using, for example, carbon fiber reinforced plastic (CFRP).
側面視においては、図10,図11に示すように、サブフレーム16の全体的な傾斜とメインフレーム15の全体的な傾斜とがほぼ対応している。但し、メインビーム15aが緩く湾曲しているのに対し、サブビーム16aは直線状に延びている。サブフレーム16は、外側を囲むメインフレーム15を補強すると同時に、後述するように可動ユニット101をスライド可能に支持する支持部材およびガイド部材として機能する。
In the side view, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the overall inclination of the subframe 16 and the overall inclination of the main frame 15 almost correspond to each other. However, while the main beam 15a is gently curved, the sub beam 16a extends linearly. The subframe 16 reinforces the main frame 15 that surrounds the outside, and at the same time, functions as a support member and a guide member that slidably support the movable unit 101 as described later.
接続ボックス106は、中空管状をなすサブフレーム16の接続ボックス支持部16cに埋め込まれた形に配置されている。つまり、接続ボックス106の上面の表示パネル109が接続ボックス支持部16cの上面に沿って位置しており、内部の機構はサブフレーム16の中空部に収容されている。表示パネル109は、液晶等からなる表示部109aを有するとともに、複数の小型のコネクタ109bを備えている。また、後述するLEDライト76をオン・オフ操作するライトスイッチ109cが表示パネル109上に配置されている。接続ボックス支持部16cの下面には、図9に示すように、接続ボックス106の金属板からなる下部カバー108が着脱可能に取り付けられている。
The connection box 106 is arranged so as to be embedded in the connection box support portion 16c of the hollow tubular subframe 16. That is, the display panel 109 on the upper surface of the connection box 106 is located along the upper surface of the connection box support portion 16c, and the internal mechanism is housed in the hollow portion of the subframe 16. The display panel 109 has a display unit 109a made of a liquid crystal display or the like, and also includes a plurality of small connectors 109b. Further, a light switch 109c for turning on / off the LED light 76, which will be described later, is arranged on the display panel 109. As shown in FIG. 9, a lower cover 108 made of a metal plate of the connection box 106 is detachably attached to the lower surface of the connection box support portion 16c.
また、図9に示すように、接続ボックス106の下部後方に、比較的大型のメインコネクタ107が配置されている。このメインコネクタ107は、サブフレーム16の横ビーム16bの下方に位置し、後方を指向するように設けられている。このメインコネクタ107には、外部の制御装置から車両内に引き込まれたケーブル(図示せず)の先端の比較的大型の集中コネクタ116(図9参照)が接続される。
Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a relatively large main connector 107 is arranged behind the lower part of the connection box 106. The main connector 107 is located below the lateral beam 16b of the subframe 16 and is provided so as to direct rearward. A relatively large centralized connector 116 (see FIG. 9) at the tip of a cable (not shown) drawn into the vehicle from an external control device is connected to the main connector 107.
可動ユニット101と接続ボックス106とを電気的に接続する前述した平帯状にまとめられたケーブル100は、メインコネクタ107の上方において接続ボックス106に接続されており、サブフレーム16の一対のサブビーム16aの間を通って可動ユニット101に達している。このケーブル100は、チェーン状の保護部材によって外周側へは湾曲し得ない構成となっており、サブビーム16aの傾斜にほぼ沿ってU字形ないしJ字形の形を保ちつつ可動ユニット101の移動を許容している。
The above-mentioned flat band-shaped cable 100 that electrically connects the movable unit 101 and the connection box 106 is connected to the connection box 106 above the main connector 107, and is connected to the pair of subbeams 16a of the subframe 16. It reaches the movable unit 101 through the gap. The cable 100 has a structure that cannot be curved toward the outer periphery due to a chain-shaped protective member, and allows the movable unit 101 to move while maintaining a U-shape or a J-shape substantially along the inclination of the sub-beam 16a. doing.
図9、図11に示すように、一対のサブビーム16aの各々の下面には、後述するように可動ユニット101をスライド可能に案内するための金属製のガイドレール20が取り付けられている。チャンネル状をなすガイドレール20は、レール面が下方を指向した形で取り付けられており、サブビーム16aの後端(つまり上端)付近から一部が横ビーム16bの範囲に重なるようにしてサブビーム16aの全長に亘って延びている。
As shown in FIGS. 9 and 11, a metal guide rail 20 for slidably guiding the movable unit 101 is attached to the lower surface of each of the pair of sub-beams 16a, as will be described later. The channel-shaped guide rail 20 is attached so that the rail surface faces downward, and the sub-beam 16a is provided so that a part of the guide rail 20 overlaps the range of the lateral beam 16b from the vicinity of the rear end (that is, the upper end) of the sub-beam 16a. It extends over the entire length.
サブフレーム16の接続ボックス支持部16cを介して互いに連結されているU字の開放端側となるメインフレーム15の下端(前端)の下面つまり一対のメインビーム15aの前端の下面には、円盤型をなす脚部取付座部33がそれぞれ形成されている。この脚部取付座部33に、円筒状の脚部12がそれぞれ取り付けられている。脚部12は、上端に該脚部12の中心線に沿って突出した図示する雄ネジを備えており、他方、脚部取付座部33は、中心に図示しない金属製のナット部を備えており、脚部12の雄ネジを上記ナット部にねじ込むことによって、脚部12が着脱可能に取り付けられている。例えば、車両自動運転装置1を車両へ搭載する際に、脚部12を取り外した状態でフレーム11を運転席2上に配置し、その後に脚部12を取り付けることが容易である。
The lower surface of the lower end (front end) of the main frame 15 which is the open end side of the U-shape connected to each other via the connection box support portion 16c of the subframe 16, that is, the lower surface of the front end of the pair of main beams 15a has a disk shape. The leg mounting seats 33 are formed. Cylindrical legs 12 are attached to the leg attachment seats 33, respectively. The leg portion 12 has a male screw shown at the upper end protruding along the center line of the leg portion 12, while the leg mounting seat portion 33 has a metal nut portion (not shown) at the center. The leg portion 12 is detachably attached by screwing the male screw of the leg portion 12 into the nut portion. For example, when mounting the vehicle automatic driving device 1 on a vehicle, it is easy to arrange the frame 11 on the driver's seat 2 with the legs 12 removed, and then attach the legs 12.
図示した実施例では、脚部12の下端に高さ調整ネジ13を備えており、車両に搭載した状態で車体フロア6に脚部12が確実に当接するように微調整が可能である。
In the illustrated embodiment, the height adjusting screw 13 is provided at the lower end of the leg portion 12, and fine adjustment is possible so that the leg portion 12 surely contacts the vehicle body floor 6 while mounted on the vehicle.
メインビーム15aの下端(前端)の上面には、球状をなすオプション部品取付部14がそれぞれ設けられている。このオプション部品取付部14は、平面視において脚部12と重なり合う位置にある。つまり、メインビーム15aを挟んで下面側に脚部12が位置し、上面側にオプション部品取付部14が位置する。このオプション部品取付部14は、任意のオプション部品、例えば空調装置用アクチュエータなどを取り付けるために用いられる。
On the upper surface of the lower end (front end) of the main beam 15a, a spherical optional component mounting portion 14 is provided. The optional component mounting portion 14 is located at a position where it overlaps with the leg portion 12 in a plan view. That is, the leg portion 12 is located on the lower surface side of the main beam 15a, and the optional component mounting portion 14 is located on the upper surface side. The optional component mounting portion 14 is used for mounting an optional component, for example, an actuator for an air conditioner.
一対のメインビーム15aの前端面には、車両幅方向に延びるペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31が取り付けられており、このペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31によって一対のメインビーム15aが互いに連結されている。
A slide rail 31 for supporting a pedal actuator extending in the vehicle width direction is attached to the front end surface of the pair of main beams 15a, and the pair of main beams 15a are connected to each other by the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator.
スライドレール31は、背面に左右一対のレール支持ブラケット32を備えており、これらのブラケット32を介して、車両前方を向くようにメインビーム15aの前端面に取り付けられている。スライドレール31は、十分な剛性を有するように金属材料から細長い板状に形成されており、図示例では、レール支持ブラケット32と一体に形成されている。略U字形をなすメインフレーム15の開放端は、このペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31によって閉じられた形となる。つまり、図5に示すように、メインフレーム15とスライドレール31とによって平面視で閉じた四角形ないし樽形が構成される。
The slide rail 31 is provided with a pair of left and right rail support brackets 32 on the back surface, and is attached to the front end surface of the main beam 15a so as to face the front of the vehicle via these brackets 32. The slide rail 31 is formed of an elongated plate shape from a metal material so as to have sufficient rigidity, and is integrally formed with the rail support bracket 32 in the illustrated example. The open end of the substantially U-shaped main frame 15 is closed by the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator. That is, as shown in FIG. 5, the main frame 15 and the slide rail 31 form a closed quadrangle or barrel in a plan view.
ペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31は、前面側の上縁および下縁に、それぞれ断面半円形をなす第1ガイド面31aおよび第2ガイド面31bを備えており、これらの第1,第2ガイド面31a,31bによってペダルアクチュエータサポート51をスライド可能に支持している。図1~図12の例では、3つのペダルアクチュエータ41(アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41A、ブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41B、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41C)に対応して3つのペダルアクチュエータサポート51を備えている。ペダルアクチュエータサポート51の詳細およびこれに取り付けられる各ペダルアクチュエータ41の詳細は後述する。なお、図示例では、全体として細長い板状をなすペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31に、軽量化のための多数の開口部が設けられているとともに、不要な部分の肉抜きがなされており、これにより、第1ガイド面31aおよび第2ガイド面31bを構成する上縁部分および下縁部分が、断面半円の棒状の外観を呈している。
The slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator is provided with a first guide surface 31a and a second guide surface 31b having a semicircular cross section on the upper edge and the lower edge on the front surface side, respectively, and these first and second guide surfaces. The pedal actuator support 51 is slidably supported by 31a and 31b. In the examples of FIGS. 1 to 12, three pedal actuator supports 51 are provided corresponding to the three pedal actuators 41 (accelerator pedal actuator 41A, brake pedal actuator 41B, clutch pedal actuator 41C). Details of the pedal actuator support 51 and details of each pedal actuator 41 attached to the pedal actuator support 51 will be described later. In the illustrated example, the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator, which has an elongated plate shape as a whole, is provided with a large number of openings for weight reduction, and unnecessary parts are lightened. As a result, the upper edge portion and the lower edge portion constituting the first guide surface 31a and the second guide surface 31b have a rod-like appearance with a semicircular cross section.
図12は、フレーム11を運転席2に搭載した状態を示している。前述したように、運転席2の背部に設けられるシートサポート27との間にベルト25が架け渡され、このベルト25を図示しない締付器で締め付けることによってフレーム11が運転席2上で固定されている。このような搭載状態において、フレーム11は、シートバック4の上端部からシートクッション3の前端へと斜め下方へ延びた姿勢となる。詳しくは、メインフレーム15の帯状をなす横ビーム15bがシートバック当接部としてシートバック4の上部に広く面接触し、ここからメインビーム15aがシートクッション3の前端へ向かって斜めに延び、メインビーム15aの前端がシートクッション3の前端から僅かに突出した状態となる。
FIG. 12 shows a state in which the frame 11 is mounted on the driver's seat 2. As described above, the belt 25 is laid between the seat support 27 provided on the back of the driver's seat 2, and the frame 11 is fixed on the driver's seat 2 by tightening the belt 25 with a tightener (not shown). ing. In such a mounted state, the frame 11 is in a posture of extending diagonally downward from the upper end of the seat back 4 to the front end of the seat cushion 3. Specifically, the strip-shaped lateral beam 15b of the main frame 15 makes wide surface contact with the upper part of the seat back 4 as a seat back contact portion, from which the main beam 15a extends diagonally toward the front end of the seat cushion 3 and is the main. The front end of the beam 15a is slightly projected from the front end of the seat cushion 3.
脚部12は、フレーム11の前端からシートクッション3前端に沿うようにして下方へ延びており、高さ調整ネジ13を具備した下端が車体フロア6に当接している。脚部12は、基本的に、車体フロア6上で垂直となる姿勢に配置される。
The leg portion 12 extends downward from the front end of the frame 11 along the front end of the seat cushion 3, and the lower end provided with the height adjusting screw 13 is in contact with the vehicle body floor 6. The legs 12 are basically arranged in a vertical position on the vehicle body floor 6.
図2の矢印F1,F2,F3は、ベルト25の締付により支持点に生じる荷重を示している。フレーム11のベルトループ26に係止されたベルト25の締付によって、フレーム11は、矢印F1で示すように、斜め下方へ引っ張られる。この引張力により、脚部12は矢印F2で示すように車体フロア6に圧接する。また、フレーム11上端(後端)のシートバック当接部つまり横ビーム16bが矢印F3で示すようにシートバック4上端部に圧接する。メインフレーム15やサブフレーム16を含むフレーム11は、シートクッション3には支持されていない。つまり、フレーム11は、脚部12とシートバック当接部の2点と、これら2点の中間部におけるベルト25の張力作用点(ベルトループ26付近)と、の計3点によって固定される。
Arrows F1, F2, and F3 in FIG. 2 indicate the load generated at the support point by tightening the belt 25. By tightening the belt 25 locked to the belt loop 26 of the frame 11, the frame 11 is pulled diagonally downward as shown by the arrow F1. Due to this tensile force, the leg portion 12 is pressed against the vehicle body floor 6 as shown by the arrow F2. Further, the seat back contact portion at the upper end (rear end) of the frame 11, that is, the lateral beam 16b is pressed against the upper end portion of the seat back 4 as shown by an arrow F3. The frame 11 including the main frame 15 and the subframe 16 is not supported by the seat cushion 3. That is, the frame 11 is fixed by a total of three points, that is, two points of the leg portion 12 and the seat back contact portion, and a tension action point of the belt 25 (near the belt loop 26) in the intermediate portion between these two points.
図2から明らかなように、車両に対する固定点である脚部12下端とシートバック当接部とを結ぶ線分(仮想の直線)のほぼ中央付近にベルト25の張力作用点(ベルトループ26)が位置し、しかも上記線分に対して概ね直交する方向にベルト25の引張力が作用するので、フレーム11が効率的にかつ堅固に固定・支持される。
As is clear from FIG. 2, the tension action point (belt loop 26) of the belt 25 is located near the center of the line segment (virtual straight line) connecting the lower end of the leg portion 12 and the seat back contact portion, which is a fixed point with respect to the vehicle. Is located, and the tensile force of the belt 25 acts in a direction substantially orthogonal to the line segment, so that the frame 11 is efficiently and firmly fixed and supported.
一般にシートクッション3が乗り心地確保のために柔軟に構成されるのに比較してシートバック4は衝突時の耐荷重性確保のために堅固に構成されている。従って、ベルト25を十分に締め付けて大きな引張荷重を与えることが可能であるとともに、シートクッション3上に載置されている場合に比較してフレーム11の支持が堅固となる。
In general, the seat cushion 3 is flexibly configured to ensure riding comfort, whereas the seat back 4 is firmly configured to ensure load bearing capacity in the event of a collision. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently tighten the belt 25 to apply a large tensile load, and the support of the frame 11 becomes firmer as compared with the case where the belt 25 is placed on the seat cushion 3.
図2、図12に示すように、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131やペダルアクチュエータ41等を含む車両自動運転装置1全体の荷重は、やはり、脚部12とシートバック当接部の2箇所に作用し、シートクッション3には作用しない。換言すれば、車両の車体フロア6とシートバック4との2箇所で車両自動運転装置1の荷重を支持する形となる。上述したようにシートバック4は堅固に構成されているので、車両自動運転装置1の支持が確実となり、試験中の車両振動による車両自動運転装置1の振動や種々のアクチュエータの作動時の反力による車両自動運転装置1の位置ズレなどが抑制される。例えば、図2から理解できるように、ペダルアクチュエータ41の作動時の反力は、斜め上方に作用するが、その反力作用線上に概ね沿ってシートバック当接部(横ビーム16b)が位置するので、堅固なシートバック4によって反力が確実に支承される。
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 12, the load of the entire vehicle automatic driving device 1 including the transmission actuator unit 131, the pedal actuator 41, and the like also acts on the leg portion 12 and the seat back contact portion, and the seat It does not act on the cushion 3. In other words, the load of the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is supported at two locations, the vehicle body floor 6 and the seat back 4. As described above, since the seat back 4 is firmly configured, the support of the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is ensured, and the vibration of the vehicle automatic driving device 1 due to the vehicle vibration during the test and the reaction force at the time of operation of various actuators are ensured. The misalignment of the vehicle automatic driving device 1 due to the above is suppressed. For example, as can be understood from FIG. 2, the reaction force when the pedal actuator 41 is operated acts diagonally upward, but the seat back contact portion (horizontal beam 16b) is located substantially along the reaction force action line. Therefore, the reaction force is surely supported by the solid seat back 4.
また図示例では、フレーム11の肩部となる横ビーム16bの上縁両端部にラバー部30が設けられているので、シートバック4の表皮の損傷が抑制される。そして、このラバー部30は、滑り止めとしても機能し、ペダルアクチュエータ41の作動時の反力によるフレーム11全体の前後方向の変位が抑制される。
Further, in the illustrated example, since the rubber portions 30 are provided at both ends of the upper edge of the lateral beam 16b which is the shoulder portion of the frame 11, damage to the skin of the seat back 4 is suppressed. The rubber portion 30 also functions as a non-slip, and the displacement of the entire frame 11 in the front-rear direction due to the reaction force when the pedal actuator 41 is operated is suppressed.
[可動ユニット101の構成およびスライド構造]
図8は、フレーム11に可動ユニット101を組み付けた状態を示し、図13および図14は、可動ユニット101を単体状態で示している。 [Structure and slide structure of movable unit 101]
FIG. 8 shows a state in which themovable unit 101 is assembled to the frame 11, and FIGS. 13 and 14 show the movable unit 101 in a single state.
図8は、フレーム11に可動ユニット101を組み付けた状態を示し、図13および図14は、可動ユニット101を単体状態で示している。 [Structure and slide structure of movable unit 101]
FIG. 8 shows a state in which the
図8に示すように、可動ユニット101は、フレーム11の中に位置し、詳しくは、メインフレーム15の一対のメインビーム15aの間に位置している。
As shown in FIG. 8, the movable unit 101 is located in the frame 11, specifically, between the pair of main beams 15a of the main frame 15.
可動ユニット101は、図13、図14に示すように、一対のサブビーム16aによって支持される可動フレーム102と、この可動フレーム102の上端ないし上面に位置する剛性を有するアクチュエータ支持プレート105と、を備えている。
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the movable unit 101 includes a movable frame 102 supported by a pair of subbeams 16a, and a rigid actuator support plate 105 located at the upper end or the upper surface of the movable frame 102. ing.
可動フレーム102は、可動フレーム102の側面を構成する左右一対のサイドフレーム103と、この一対のサイドフレーム103の間に挟まれた断面三角形の箱状をなす第2接続ボックス104と、を備えている。
The movable frame 102 includes a pair of left and right side frames 103 forming side surfaces of the movable frame 102, and a second connection box 104 having a triangular cross section sandwiched between the pair of side frames 103. There is.
各々のサイドフレーム103は、フレーム11と同様に例えば炭素繊維強化プラスチック(CFRP)を用いて一部材として構成されたものであって、側面視において頂角が鈍角となった略三角形をなしている。つまり、車両搭載状態において基本的に水平となる一辺103aと、この辺103aの前端から斜め下方へ延びる一辺103bと、サブビーム16aに沿って傾斜する底辺103cと、を有する略三角形状をなしている。そして、トラス構造をなすように複数の窓部が開口形成されている。
Like the frame 11, each side frame 103 is configured as one member by using, for example, carbon fiber reinforced plastic (CFRP), and has a substantially triangular shape having an obtuse apex angle in a side view. .. That is, it has a substantially triangular shape having one side 103a that is basically horizontal in the vehicle-mounted state, one side 103b that extends diagonally downward from the front end of this side 103a, and a base 103c that is inclined along the sub-beam 16a. Then, a plurality of windows are formed so as to form a truss structure.
一対のサイドフレーム103は、第2接続ボックス104によって互いに連結されている。第2接続ボックス104は、サイドフレーム103の辺103bに沿った前壁104aと、サイドフレーム103の底辺103cと平行となるように傾斜した後壁104bと、サイドフレーム103に隣接した一対の側壁104cと、を有し、内部空間に図示しない配線類が収容されている。接続ボックス106から延びる前述した平帯状のケーブル100の先端は、後壁104b側から第2接続ボックス104に接続されている。
The pair of side frames 103 are connected to each other by the second connection box 104. The second connection box 104 includes a front wall 104a along the side 103b of the side frame 103, a rear wall 104b inclined so as to be parallel to the bottom side 103c of the side frame 103, and a pair of side walls 104c adjacent to the side frame 103. And, wirings (not shown) are housed in the internal space. The tip of the above-mentioned flat band-shaped cable 100 extending from the connection box 106 is connected to the second connection box 104 from the rear wall 104b side.
一対のサイドフレーム103の底辺103cには、略長方形の板状をなすスライダカバープレート111がそれぞれ取り付けられている。一対のスライダカバープレート111は、各々のサイドフレーム103から互いに内側へ張り出すように設けられている。つまり、一対のサイドフレーム103は、サブビーム16aの車両幅方向外側に隣接して位置し、サイドフレーム103の各々の底辺103cからサブビーム16aの下面を覆うようにスライダカバープレート111が突出している。サブビーム16aの下面に対向する各々のスライダカバープレート111の上面には、前述したサブビーム16a下面のガイドレール20に対応した前後2つのスライダ110が取り付けられている(図14参照)。スライダ110は、チャンネル状をなすガイドレール20とスライド可能に係合する。このスライダ110とガイドレール20との係合によって、可動ユニット101の荷重が支持され、かつ、可動ユニット101がサブビーム16aに沿った方向にスライド可能に案内される。
A slider cover plate 111 having a substantially rectangular plate shape is attached to the bottom 103c of the pair of side frames 103, respectively. The pair of slider cover plates 111 are provided so as to project inward from each side frame 103. That is, the pair of side frames 103 are located adjacent to the outer side of the sub beam 16a in the vehicle width direction, and the slider cover plate 111 projects from the bottom side 103c of each side frame 103 so as to cover the lower surface of the sub beam 16a. Two front and rear sliders 110 corresponding to the guide rail 20 on the lower surface of the sub beam 16a described above are attached to the upper surface of each slider cover plate 111 facing the lower surface of the sub beam 16a (see FIG. 14). The slider 110 is slidably engaged with the channel-shaped guide rail 20. By engaging the slider 110 with the guide rail 20, the load of the movable unit 101 is supported, and the movable unit 101 is slidably guided in the direction along the sub-beam 16a.
ガイドレール20やスライダ110としては、市場で入手可能な汎用の部品を利用することができる。スライダ110は、前後2箇所にあり、可動ユニット101全体として四角形の頂点をなすように計4箇所に配置されているので、可動ユニット101の移動(位置調整に際してのスライド操作)が円滑となり、また、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131作動時に可動ユニット101に作用する反力に対する剛性が高く得られる。しかも、ガイドレール20とスライダ110との組み合わせによるガイド機構は、一般に、ガイドレール20の幅方向(取付面に沿った方向)における剛性ないし案内精度が高い。そのため、鉛直方向下方へ向かった姿勢で一対のガイドレール20を配置した図示の構成とすることで、可動ユニット101の車両幅方向についての支持剛性が高く得られる。
As the guide rail 20 and the slider 110, general-purpose parts available on the market can be used. The sliders 110 are located at two locations in the front-rear direction, and are arranged at a total of four locations so as to form the vertices of a quadrangle as a whole of the movable unit 101. , High rigidity against the reaction force acting on the movable unit 101 when the transmission actuator unit 131 is operated can be obtained. Moreover, the guide mechanism obtained by combining the guide rail 20 and the slider 110 generally has high rigidity or guidance accuracy in the width direction (direction along the mounting surface) of the guide rail 20. Therefore, by adopting the illustrated configuration in which the pair of guide rails 20 are arranged in a posture facing downward in the vertical direction, high support rigidity of the movable unit 101 in the vehicle width direction can be obtained.
なお、前後2箇所のスライダ110の少なくとも一方は、自重による可動ユニット101の移動が生じない程度にガイドレール20との間でフリクションを与える構成であることが望ましい。
It is desirable that at least one of the two front and rear sliders 110 is configured to provide friction with the guide rail 20 to the extent that the movable unit 101 does not move due to its own weight.
各々のスライダカバープレート111には、さらに、該スライダカバープレート111を貫通したネジ孔に螺合する固定ネジ113が設けられている。この固定ネジ113は、手指にて回転操作可能なように構成されており、先端が2つのスライダ110の間で図示せぬパッドないしシューを押圧する。つまり、この固定ネジ113をガイドレール20へ向かってねじ込むと、ネジ先端がパッドないしシューを介してガイドレール20に圧接し、これにより、可動ユニット101が移動しないようにスライド機構がロックされる。作業者は例えばシートクッション3ないしシートバック4とメインフレーム15との間に生じる隙間を通して固定ネジ113に容易にアクセスすることができる。
Each slider cover plate 111 is further provided with a fixing screw 113 that is screwed into a screw hole that penetrates the slider cover plate 111. The fixing screw 113 is configured so that it can be rotated by a finger, and its tip presses a pad or shoe (not shown) between the two sliders 110. That is, when the fixing screw 113 is screwed toward the guide rail 20, the tip of the screw comes into pressure contact with the guide rail 20 via the pad or shoe, whereby the slide mechanism is locked so that the movable unit 101 does not move. The operator can easily access the fixing screw 113 through, for example, a gap created between the seat cushion 3 or the seat back 4 and the main frame 15.
金属板からなるアクチュエータ支持プレート105は、平面視において長方形状をなしており、三角形をなすサイドフレーム103の水平となる辺103aに沿って配置されている。このアクチュエータ支持プレート105は、サイドフレーム103の辺103aの上面に取り付けられており、平行に位置する一対のサイドフレーム103を互いに連結している。アクチュエータ支持プレート105の車両幅方向の寸法は、一対のサイドフレーム103により形成される車両幅方向の寸法よりも大きく、従って、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の両側の側部は、それぞれサイドフレーム103よりも外側へ突出している。第2接続ボックス104は、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の下面を覆うように取り付けられている。なお、平面視においては、アクチュエータ支持プレート105は可動フレーム102の前寄りに片寄って位置しており、サイドフレーム103の後端部がアクチュエータ支持プレート105から後方へ突出している。
The actuator support plate 105 made of a metal plate has a rectangular shape in a plan view, and is arranged along the horizontal side 103a of the triangular side frame 103. The actuator support plate 105 is attached to the upper surface of the side 103a of the side frame 103, and connects a pair of side frames 103 located in parallel to each other. The vehicle width dimension of the actuator support plate 105 is larger than the vehicle width dimension formed by the pair of side frames 103, so that the side portions on both sides of the actuator support plate 105 are each outside the side frame 103. It protrudes to. The second connection box 104 is attached so as to cover the lower surface of the actuator support plate 105. In a plan view, the actuator support plate 105 is located on the front side of the movable frame 102, and the rear end portion of the side frame 103 projects rearward from the actuator support plate 105.
アクチュエータ支持プレート105の上面には、後述するようにトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131が着脱可能に取り付けられる(図15,図16参照)。このトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の取付のために、長方形状をなすアクチュエータ支持プレート105の四隅の中の2箇所に、ロック孔121aを備えたグロメット121がそれぞれ埋設されている。つまり、グロメット121は、前側グロメット121Aと後側グロメット121Bとを含んでおり、両者が四角形の対角線上に配置されている。これらはいずれも同一の構成であるので、個々に区別する必要がない場合には、グロメット121と総称する。
The transmission actuator unit 131 is detachably attached to the upper surface of the actuator support plate 105 as described later (see FIGS. 15 and 16). For mounting the transmission actuator unit 131, grommets 121 having lock holes 121a are embedded at two positions in the four corners of the rectangular actuator support plate 105. That is, the grommet 121 includes the front grommet 121A and the rear grommet 121B, both of which are arranged on the diagonal line of the quadrangle. Since all of these have the same configuration, they are collectively referred to as grommet 121 when it is not necessary to distinguish them individually.
同様に、アクチュエータ支持プレート105には、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131との間で電気的接続を行うためのトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット用コネクタ123が設けられている。トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット用コネクタ123は、前側コネクタ123Aと後側コネクタ123Bとを含んでいる。前側コネクタ123Aは、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の前側に位置し、前側グロメット121Aに隣接している。後側コネクタ123Bは、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の後側に位置し、後側グロメット121Bに隣接している。これらはいずれも同一の構成であるので、個々に区別する必要がない場合には、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット用コネクタ123と総称する。これらのトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット用コネクタ123としては、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の上面(つまりトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の取付面)から上方へ端子片が突出し、かつ相手側との間で多少の位置ズレを許容し得るように端子片が浮動状態に構成された形式のコネクタが用いられている。また、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット用コネクタ123は、相手側のコネクタとの間で位置決めないし挿入時の案内を行うためのガイドピン123aおよびガイドスリーブ123bを備えた形式となっている。なお、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット用コネクタ123としては、市場で入手可能な汎用の部品を用いることができる。トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット用コネクタ123の各端子は、第2接続ボックス104内に収容された配線に接続されており、最終的には、第2接続ボックス104からケーブル100を介して接続ボックス106に接続されている。
Similarly, the actuator support plate 105 is provided with a transmission actuator unit connector 123 for making an electrical connection with the transmission actuator unit 131. The transmission actuator unit connector 123 includes a front connector 123A and a rear connector 123B. The front connector 123A is located on the front side of the actuator support plate 105 and is adjacent to the front grommet 121A. The rear connector 123B is located on the rear side of the actuator support plate 105 and is adjacent to the rear grommet 121B. Since all of these have the same configuration, they are collectively referred to as the transmission actuator unit connector 123 when it is not necessary to distinguish them individually. As the connector 123 for the transmission actuator unit, the terminal piece protrudes upward from the upper surface of the actuator support plate 105 (that is, the mounting surface of the transmission actuator unit 131), and a slight positional deviation from the mating side can be tolerated. As described above, a connector in which the terminal pieces are configured in a floating state is used. Further, the transmission actuator unit connector 123 is provided with a guide pin 123a and a guide sleeve 123b for guiding the connector at the time of positioning or insertion with the connector on the other side. As the connector 123 for the transmission actuator unit, general-purpose parts available on the market can be used. Each terminal of the transmission actuator unit connector 123 is connected to the wiring housed in the second connection box 104, and is finally connected to the connection box 106 from the second connection box 104 via the cable 100. ing.
アクチュエータ支持プレート105の前側に位置する前側グロメット121Aおよび前側コネクタ123Aと、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の後側に位置する後側グロメット121Bおよび後側コネクタ123Bと、は、長方形状をなすアクチュエータ支持プレート105の中心を対称点とした点対称の関係にある。つまり、180°回転させたときに互いに重なる配置・構成となっている。
The front grommet 121A and the front connector 123A located on the front side of the actuator support plate 105 and the rear grommet 121B and the rear connector 123B located on the rear side of the actuator support plate 105 form a rectangular shape of the actuator support plate 105. There is a point-symmetrical relationship with the center as the point of symmetry. That is, the arrangement and configuration are such that they overlap each other when rotated by 180 °.
また、アクチュエータ支持プレート105は、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を位置決めするための四角形のロケート用開口部124を備えている。ロケート用開口部124は、前側ロケート用開口部124Aと後側ロケート用開口部124Bとを含んでいる。前側ロケート用開口部124Aは、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の前側において、前側グロメット121Aとは車両幅方向で反対側となる位置に配置されている。後側ロケート用開口部124Bは、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の後側において、後側グロメット121Bとは車両幅方向で反対側となる位置に配置されている。前側ロケート用開口部124Aと後側ロケート用開口部124Bとは、やはり長方形状をなすアクチュエータ支持プレート105の中心を対称点とした点対称の関係にある。
Further, the actuator support plate 105 is provided with a square locating opening 124 for positioning the transmission actuator unit 131. The locating opening 124 includes a front locating opening 124A and a rear locating opening 124B. The front locating opening 124A is arranged on the front side of the actuator support plate 105 at a position opposite to the front grommet 121A in the vehicle width direction. The rear locating opening 124B is arranged on the rear side of the actuator support plate 105 at a position opposite to the rear grommet 121B in the vehicle width direction. The front locating opening 124A and the rear locating opening 124B are in a point-symmetrical relationship with the center of the actuator support plate 105, which also has a rectangular shape, as a point of symmetry.
さらに、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の左右それぞれの側縁には、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を位置決めするための略U字形をなすロケート用切欠部125がそれぞれ設けられている。この2つのロケート用切欠部125は、左右それぞれの側縁の中央に位置し、かつ互いに線対称および点対称となる関係にある。
Further, each of the left and right side edges of the actuator support plate 105 is provided with a substantially U-shaped notch 125 for locating for positioning the transmission actuator unit 131. The two locating notches 125 are located at the center of the left and right side edges, and are line-symmetrical and point-symmetrical to each other.
図6~図8は、可動ユニット101の上面にトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131が取り付けられた状態を示しているが、特に、可動ユニット101のフレーム11に対する位置調整を説明するための図である。前述したように、可動ユニット101は、フレーム11のサブビーム16aに沿って上下に(つまり前後に)スライドさせることができる。図6は、可動ユニット101を比較的高い位置に設定した状態を示しており、図7、図8は、可動ユニット101を比較的低い位置に設定した状態を示している。このような可動ユニット101の位置調整によって、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の高さ位置ひいてはグリップハンド168の基本的な高さ位置が変化し、車種によって高さないし長さが異なるシフトレバーに広く対応することが可能となる。
6 to 8 show a state in which the transmission actuator unit 131 is attached to the upper surface of the movable unit 101, and in particular, it is a diagram for explaining the position adjustment of the movable unit 101 with respect to the frame 11. As described above, the movable unit 101 can be slid up and down (that is, back and forth) along the sub-beam 16a of the frame 11. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the movable unit 101 is set at a relatively high position, and FIGS. 7 and 8 show a state in which the movable unit 101 is set at a relatively low position. By adjusting the position of the movable unit 101 in this way, the height position of the transmission actuator unit 131 and thus the basic height position of the grip hand 168 are changed, and it is possible to widely support shift levers having different lengths depending on the vehicle model. Is possible.
ここで、図6のように可動ユニット101の位置を高くすると、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131が相対的に後退し、図7等のように可動ユニット101の位置を低くすると、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131が相対的に前進した位置となるが、このような前後方向の変化は、前後方向に動作するシフト用アクチュエータ134の初期位置の設定によって吸収可能である。例えば、仮に図6の場合と図7の場合とで車両におけるシフトレバーの前後位置が同一であると仮定すると、図6のように可動ユニット101の位置を高くすると相対的にシフトレバーまでの距離が長くなることになるが、この場合にはグリップハンド168が比較的長く突出した位置を制御の基準位置とすることで、容易に対応できる。
Here, when the position of the movable unit 101 is raised as shown in FIG. 6, the transmission actuator unit 131 is relatively retracted, and when the position of the movable unit 101 is lowered as shown in FIG. 7, the transmission actuator unit 131 is relatively retracted. Such a change in the front-rear direction can be absorbed by setting the initial position of the shift actuator 134 that operates in the front-rear direction. For example, assuming that the front-rear position of the shift lever in the vehicle is the same in the case of FIG. 6 and the case of FIG. 7, the distance to the shift lever is relatively high when the position of the movable unit 101 is raised as shown in FIG. However, in this case, it can be easily dealt with by setting the position where the grip hand 168 protrudes relatively long as the control reference position.
なお、後述するように、図示の実施例では、シフト用アクチュエータ134は、セレクト用アクチュエータ133に対して上下に揺動可能である。従って、この上下揺動によっても、シフトレバー頭部の高さ位置の多少の差異に対応することができる。
As will be described later, in the illustrated embodiment, the shift actuator 134 can swing up and down with respect to the select actuator 133. Therefore, even with this vertical swing, it is possible to cope with a slight difference in the height position of the shift lever head.
上記のような可動ユニット101(ひいてはトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131)の上下・前後の位置調整は、車両自動運転装置1を図1等のように運転席2上に搭載した状態のまま行うことができる。従って、試行錯誤的な作業が不要であり、車両自動運転装置1を車両内に組み付けた後に、シフトレバーとの位置関係が最適となるように容易に調整が可能である。
The vertical and front-rear position adjustments of the movable unit 101 (and by extension, the transmission actuator unit 131) as described above can be performed with the vehicle automatic driving device 1 mounted on the driver's seat 2 as shown in FIG. Therefore, no trial and error work is required, and after the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is assembled in the vehicle, it can be easily adjusted so that the positional relationship with the shift lever is optimized.
[トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の構成および着脱構造]
トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131は、可動ユニット101に対して簡単に着脱できる構成を有する。そして、可動ユニット101に対する取付姿勢(前後の向き)を180°反転させることで、いわゆる右ハンドル車用の態様と左ハンドル車用の態様とに容易に変更することができる。 [Configuration and attachment / detachment structure of transmission actuator unit 131]
Thetransmission actuator unit 131 has a configuration that can be easily attached to and detached from the movable unit 101. Then, by reversing the mounting posture (front-rear direction) with respect to the movable unit 101 by 180 °, the mode can be easily changed between the mode for a so-called right-hand drive vehicle and the mode for a left-hand drive vehicle.
トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131は、可動ユニット101に対して簡単に着脱できる構成を有する。そして、可動ユニット101に対する取付姿勢(前後の向き)を180°反転させることで、いわゆる右ハンドル車用の態様と左ハンドル車用の態様とに容易に変更することができる。 [Configuration and attachment / detachment structure of transmission actuator unit 131]
The
図8、図9、図15は、可動ユニット101からトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を取り外した状態を示している。図17~図22は、取り外したトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を単体で示している。
8, 9, and 15 show a state in which the transmission actuator unit 131 is removed from the movable unit 101. 17 to 22 show the removed transmission actuator unit 131 as a single unit.
前述したように、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131は、車両幅方向に沿ったセレクト操作を行うセレクト用アクチュエータ133と、車両前後方向に沿ったシフト操作を行うシフト用アクチュエータ134と、を組み合わせて構成されている。
As described above, the transmission actuator unit 131 is configured by combining a select actuator 133 that performs a select operation along the vehicle width direction and a shift actuator 134 that performs a shift operation along the vehicle front-rear direction. ..
トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131は、比較的厚く剛性の高いベースプレート132を備え、このベースプレート132の上にセレクト用アクチュエータ133が構成されている。セレクト用アクチュエータ133は、車両幅方向に沿って細長い箱状をなすアクチュエータハウジング135を有し、このアクチュエータハウジング135がベースプレート132上に固定されている。また、アクチュエータハウジング135の長手方向中央部には、一方の側に箱状のコネクタカバー137を備え、他方の側に箱状のモータカバー138を備えている。なお、図示例では、コネクタカバー137はアクチュエータハウジング135と一体に連続している。
The transmission actuator unit 131 is provided with a relatively thick and highly rigid base plate 132, and a select actuator 133 is configured on the base plate 132. The select actuator 133 has an actuator housing 135 that has an elongated box shape along the vehicle width direction, and the actuator housing 135 is fixed on the base plate 132. Further, in the central portion of the actuator housing 135 in the longitudinal direction, a box-shaped connector cover 137 is provided on one side, and a box-shaped motor cover 138 is provided on the other side. In the illustrated example, the connector cover 137 is integrally continuous with the actuator housing 135.
ベースプレート132は、平坦な板状をなし、図17、図18等に示すように、これらのアクチュエータハウジング135とコネクタカバー137とモータカバー138の三者の外側の輪郭に概ね沿った外形を有している。すなわち、ベースプレート132は、長手方向の両端部では幅(車両前後方向の寸法)が狭く、中央部では幅が広くなった形状を有している。
The base plate 132 has a flat plate shape, and as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, has an outer shape substantially along the outer contours of the actuator housing 135, the connector cover 137, and the motor cover 138. ing. That is, the base plate 132 has a shape in which the width (dimensions in the vehicle front-rear direction) is narrow at both ends in the longitudinal direction and the width is wide at the center.
セレクト用アクチュエータ133は、モータカバー138の中に収容された電動モータおよび減速機の作用によりアクチュエータロッドとなるラック軸141が車両幅方向に移動するピニオン・ラック形式の直線運動型アクチュエータである。ラック軸141は、後退状態においてはそのほぼ全体がアクチュエータハウジング135の中に収容されており、アクチュエータハウジング135の一方の端部(コネクタカバー137を前方へ向けたときに左手側となる端部)からラック軸141の先端部のみが突出している。このラック軸141の先端部に、後述するように、シフト用アクチュエータ134が支持されている。図1等に示したいわゆる右ハンドル車用の構成では、運転席2上に位置するフレーム11や可動ユニット101に対して左手側にシフト用アクチュエータ134が位置する。なお、ラック軸141は、シフト用アクチュエータ134の荷重を支承しつつ精度よく直線運動し得るように、アクチュエータハウジング135の内部の図示しないガイド機構によって案内されている。
The select actuator 133 is a pinion rack type linear motion actuator in which the rack shaft 141, which is the actuator rod, moves in the vehicle width direction by the action of the electric motor and the speed reducer housed in the motor cover 138. Almost the entire rack shaft 141 is housed in the actuator housing 135 in the retracted state, and one end of the actuator housing 135 (the end that is on the left hand side when the connector cover 137 is directed forward). Only the tip of the rack shaft 141 protrudes from the rack shaft 141. A shift actuator 134 is supported at the tip of the rack shaft 141, as will be described later. In the configuration for a so-called right-hand drive vehicle shown in FIG. 1 and the like, the shift actuator 134 is located on the left hand side with respect to the frame 11 and the movable unit 101 located on the driver's seat 2. The rack shaft 141 is guided by a guide mechanism (not shown) inside the actuator housing 135 so that the rack shaft 141 can move linearly with high accuracy while bearing the load of the shift actuator 134.
図17、図18に示すように、コネクタカバー137の一側部(車両幅方向に沿った一方の側部)およびモータカバー138の反対側の一側部においては、ベースプレート132がアクチュエータハウジング135やコネクタカバー137およびモータカバー138の輪郭から張り出しており、対角線上に位置する一対の延長部132aとして形成されている。延長部132aを含めたベースプレート132中央部分の四角形の範囲は、可動ユニット101のアクチュエータ支持プレート105の外形状に対応した形状をなす。そして、この一対の延長部132aの各々に、前述した可動ユニット101側のアクチュエータ支持プレート105のグロメット121とともにロック機構143を構成するロックピン144が配設されている。ロックピン144は、下端部がベースプレート132の面から下方へ突出し、かつ、手指にて回転操作するための摘み部145を上端部に備えている。このロック機構143は、グロメット121のロック孔121aに挿入したロックピン144を一定角度(例えば90°ないし180°)回転させることで軸方向の締付を伴うロックが行われる汎用のスクリュー形式のものである(図15、図16参照)。
As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in one side of the connector cover 137 (one side along the vehicle width direction) and the other side of the motor cover 138, the base plate 132 is the actuator housing 135 and It projects from the contours of the connector cover 137 and the motor cover 138, and is formed as a pair of extension portions 132a located diagonally. The quadrangular range of the central portion of the base plate 132 including the extension portion 132a has a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the actuator support plate 105 of the movable unit 101. Each of the pair of extension portions 132a is provided with a lock pin 144 constituting the lock mechanism 143 together with the grommet 121 of the actuator support plate 105 on the movable unit 101 side described above. The lower end of the lock pin 144 projects downward from the surface of the base plate 132, and the upper end is provided with a knob portion 145 for rotational operation by fingers. The lock mechanism 143 is a general-purpose screw type that locks with axial tightening by rotating the lock pin 144 inserted into the lock hole 121a of the grommet 121 by a certain angle (for example, 90 ° to 180 °). (See FIGS. 15 and 16).
ここで説明の便宜のために、両者の区別が必要な場合は、コネクタカバー137側のロックピン144を第1ロックピン144Aと呼び、モータカバー138側のロックピン144を第2ロックピン144Bと呼ぶこととする。
For convenience of explanation here, when it is necessary to distinguish between the two, the lock pin 144 on the connector cover 137 side is referred to as the first lock pin 144A, and the lock pin 144 on the motor cover 138 side is referred to as the second lock pin 144B. I will call it.
一対のロックピン144は、それぞれアクチュエータ支持プレート105のグロメット121に係合する。詳しくは、図8等に示すように、いわゆる右ハンドル車用の態様では、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の前側に位置する前側グロメット121Aに第1ロックピン144Aが係合し、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の後側に位置する後側グロメット121Bに第2ロックピン144Bが係合する。一対のロック機構143をロック状態とすることで、ベースプレート132はアクチュエータ支持プレート105に対して締め付けられ、堅固に固定される。
The pair of lock pins 144 engage with the grommet 121 of the actuator support plate 105, respectively. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 and the like, in the mode for a so-called right-hand drive vehicle, the first lock pin 144A engages with the front grommet 121A located on the front side of the actuator support plate 105, and the rear side of the actuator support plate 105. The second lock pin 144B engages with the rear grommet 121B located at. By locking the pair of locking mechanisms 143, the base plate 132 is tightened against the actuator support plate 105 and is firmly fixed.
また、ベースプレート132の底面においては、図20、図22に示すように、アクチュエータ支持プレート105におけるトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット用コネクタ123に対応したトランスミッションアクチュエータ側コネクタ171が設けられている。このコネクタ171は、コネクタカバー137に覆われる位置にあり、特に、上述した右ハンドル車用の態様でトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131をアクチュエータ支持プレート105上に取り付けたときに、前側コネクタ123Aに対応することとなる位置に配置されている。コネクタ171は、アクチュエータ支持プレート105側のコネクタ123に対応して、端子片が浮動状態に構成されかつガイドピン171aおよびガイドスリーブ171bを備えた形式となっている。従って、コネクタ171,123同士で互いの位置が案内されることとなり、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の上にトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を載せ、かつロック機構143によりベースプレート132とアクチュエータ支持プレート105とを互いに締め付けるだけで、両コネクタ171,123の接続が完了する。
Further, on the bottom surface of the base plate 132, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, a transmission actuator side connector 171 corresponding to the transmission actuator unit connector 123 in the actuator support plate 105 is provided. The connector 171 is located at a position covered by the connector cover 137, and particularly corresponds to the front connector 123A when the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the actuator support plate 105 in the above-described aspect for a right-hand drive vehicle. It is arranged in the position of. The connector 171 has a terminal piece configured in a floating state and is provided with a guide pin 171a and a guide sleeve 171b, corresponding to the connector 123 on the actuator support plate 105 side. Therefore, the positions of the connectors 171 and 123 are guided to each other, and the transmission actuator unit 131 is simply placed on the actuator support plate 105, and the base plate 132 and the actuator support plate 105 are simply tightened by the lock mechanism 143. , The connection of both connectors 171 and 123 is completed.
なお、ベースプレート132の上面側では、このコネクタ171の部分をコネクタカバー137が覆っている。コネクタ171に至る図示しないケーブルも、コネクタカバー137やアクチュエータハウジング135の内部を通して配線されており、外部には露出していない。
On the upper surface side of the base plate 132, the connector cover 137 covers the portion of the connector 171. A cable (not shown) leading to the connector 171 is also wired through the inside of the connector cover 137 and the actuator housing 135, and is not exposed to the outside.
ベースプレート132において上記トランスミッションアクチュエータ側コネクタ171と点対称となる位置には、該コネクタ171と同様の大きさの長方形状をなす開口部175が開口形成されている。上述した右ハンドル車用の態様でトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131をアクチュエータ支持プレート105上に取り付けたときに、使用されていない後側コネクタ123Bのガイドピン171a等を含む突出部分は、開口部175に受容される。つまり、使用されていない後側コネクタ123Bがベースプレート132に干渉することがない。
A rectangular opening 175 having the same size as the connector 171 is formed at a position of the base plate 132 that is point-symmetrical to the transmission actuator side connector 171. When the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the actuator support plate 105 in the above-described aspect for a right-hand drive vehicle, the protruding portion including the guide pin 171a of the unused rear connector 123B is received by the opening 175. NS. That is, the unused rear connector 123B does not interfere with the base plate 132.
さらに、ベースプレート132の底面には、コネクタ171を保護するための脚部176が角柱状に突出して設けられている。脚部176は、モータカバー138の下方位置にある第1脚部176Aと、ベースプレート132の中心線上で互いに左右に離れて位置した第2脚部176Bおよび第3脚部176Cと、を含んでいる。詳しくは、第1脚部176Aは、上述した右ハンドル車用の態様でトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131をアクチュエータ支持プレート105上に取り付けたときにアクチュエータ支持プレート105の後側ロケート用開口部124Bに対応する位置に配置されており、この後側ロケート用開口部124Bに比較的密に嵌合する。第2脚部176Bおよび第3脚部176Cは、同じく右ハンドル車用の態様でトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131をアクチュエータ支持プレート105上に取り付けたときに、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の左右の側縁に設けられた一対のロケート用切欠部125にそれぞれ対応する位置にあり、このロケート用切欠部125に比較的密に係合する。
Further, on the bottom surface of the base plate 132, leg portions 176 for protecting the connector 171 are provided so as to project in a prismatic shape. The leg portion 176 includes a first leg portion 176A located below the motor cover 138, and a second leg portion 176B and a third leg portion 176C located laterally apart from each other on the center line of the base plate 132. .. Specifically, the first leg portion 176A is located at a position corresponding to the rear locating opening 124B of the actuator support plate 105 when the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the actuator support plate 105 in the above-described aspect for a right-hand drive vehicle. It fits relatively tightly into the rear locating opening 124B. The second leg portion 176B and the third leg portion 176C are provided on the left and right side edges of the actuator support plate 105 when the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the actuator support plate 105 in the same manner for a right-hand drive vehicle. It is located at a position corresponding to each of the pair of locating notches 125 and engages with the locating notches 125 relatively tightly.
これら3つの脚部176がアクチュエータ支持プレート105の後側ロケート用開口部124Bおよびロケート用切欠部125に係合することで、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131はアクチュエータ支持プレート105に対して確実に位置決めされる。つまり、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を取り付ける際のガイドとなるとともに、取り付けた後は、アクチュエータ支持プレート105に対する支持剛性の向上に寄与する。脚部176がロケート用開口部124およびロケート用切欠部125に比較的密に係合することで、例えば、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の動作時の反力による位置ズレが抑制される。
By engaging these three leg portions 176 with the rear locating opening 124B and the locating notch 125 of the actuator support plate 105, the transmission actuator unit 131 is reliably positioned with respect to the actuator support plate 105. That is, it serves as a guide when the transmission actuator unit 131 is attached, and also contributes to the improvement of the support rigidity with respect to the actuator support plate 105 after the attachment. By relatively tightly engaging the leg portion 176 with the locating opening 124 and the locating notch 125, for example, the displacement due to the reaction force during operation of the transmission actuator unit 131 is suppressed.
なお、脚部176は、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131をアクチュエータ支持プレート105に載せる際に、コネクタ123,171同士が干渉する前に、該脚部176がロケート用開口部124ないしロケート用切欠部125に入り込んでトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の取付位置の案内がなされるように、その突出長を設定することが望ましい。
When the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the actuator support plate 105, the leg portion 176 enters the locating opening 124 or the locating notch 125 before the connectors 123 and 171 interfere with each other. It is desirable to set the protruding length of the transmission actuator unit 131 so that the mounting position of the transmission actuator unit 131 is guided by the above.
また3つの脚部176は、同一の突出長を有し、かつこの突出長は、ベースプレート132底面におけるロックピン144の突出長やコネクタ171のガイドピン171aおよびガイドスリーブ171bの突出長よりも大きい。従って、取り外し状態にあるトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を適当な置き台の上に載せたときに、これら3つの脚部176によってトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を支持することができ、かつロックピン144やコネクタ171が置き台と干渉することがない。
Further, the three legs 176 have the same protruding length, and this protruding length is larger than the protruding length of the lock pin 144 on the bottom surface of the base plate 132 and the protruding length of the guide pin 171a and the guide sleeve 171b of the connector 171. Therefore, when the removed transmission actuator unit 131 is placed on an appropriate stand, the transmission actuator unit 131 can be supported by these three legs 176, and the lock pin 144 and the connector 171 are placed. Does not interfere with the platform.
さらに、ベースプレート132の底面には、第1脚部176Aに隣接した位置に、セレクト用アクチュエータ133をロックするためのストッパ機構182(図25参照)を構成するストッパピン181が設けられている(図22参照)。このストッパピン181は、ベースプレート132の底面と直交する方向に沿って進退可能に配置されているとともに、内部のコイルスプリング185(図24参照)によって突出方向に常時付勢されている。このストッパピン181は、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131をアクチュエータ支持プレート105に取り付けた状態では、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の上面に当接し、該アクチュエータ支持プレート105に押されて後退する。つまり、ストッパピン181は、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131が取り外されている場合の自由状態における突出位置と、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131がアクチュエータ支持プレート105に取り付けられていて該アクチュエータ支持プレート105に押されているときの後退位置と、を有する。そして、ストッパピン181の突出位置では、内部のストッパ機構182がセレクト用アクチュエータ133をロックつまり固定し、ストッパピン181の後退位置ではストッパ機構182はセレクト用アクチュエータ133を解放つまり自由状態とする。
Further, on the bottom surface of the base plate 132, a stopper pin 181 constituting a stopper mechanism 182 (see FIG. 25) for locking the select actuator 133 is provided at a position adjacent to the first leg portion 176A (FIG. 25). 22). The stopper pin 181 is arranged so as to be able to advance and retreat along a direction orthogonal to the bottom surface of the base plate 132, and is constantly urged in the protruding direction by an internal coil spring 185 (see FIG. 24). When the transmission actuator unit 131 is attached to the actuator support plate 105, the stopper pin 181 abuts on the upper surface of the actuator support plate 105 and is pushed back by the actuator support plate 105. That is, the stopper pin 181 has a protruding position in a free state when the transmission actuator unit 131 is removed, and when the transmission actuator unit 131 is attached to the actuator support plate 105 and is pushed by the actuator support plate 105. Has a retracted position and. Then, at the protruding position of the stopper pin 181 the internal stopper mechanism 182 locks or fixes the select actuator 133, and at the retracted position of the stopper pin 181 the stopper mechanism 182 releases the select actuator 133, that is, in a free state.
図24および図25は、ストッパ機構182の一例を示している。セレクト用アクチュエータ133の電動モータは、傘歯歯車183を介して歯車列からなる減速機184を駆動し、これによりラック軸141が進退するように構成されているが、ストッパ機構182として、減速機184の中の1つの歯車184aとストッパピン181の爪片181aとが噛み合う構成となっている。つまり、ストッパピン181が突出位置にあると、該ストッパピン181の爪片181aが歯車184aと係合し、これにより減速機184の回転が不能となる。一方、ストッパピン181が後退位置にあるときには、ストッパピン181の爪片181aと歯車184aとがストッパピン181の軸方向に離れた位置となり、歯車184aの自由な回転が可能となる。
24 and 25 show an example of the stopper mechanism 182. The electric motor of the select actuator 133 is configured to drive a speed reducer 184 composed of a gear train via a bevel gear 183 so that the rack shaft 141 moves forward and backward. However, as a stopper mechanism 182, the speed reducer One of the gears 184a in 184 and the claw piece 181a of the stopper pin 181 mesh with each other. That is, when the stopper pin 181 is in the protruding position, the claw piece 181a of the stopper pin 181 engages with the gear 184a, which makes it impossible to rotate the speed reducer 184. On the other hand, when the stopper pin 181 is in the retracted position, the claw piece 181a of the stopper pin 181 and the gear 184a are positioned apart in the axial direction of the stopper pin 181, and the gear 184a can freely rotate.
従って、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131をアクチュエータ支持プレート105から取り外して持ち上げたときには、ストッパピン181がコイルスプリング185によって突出することで、セレクト用アクチュエータ133がロックされる。従って、ラック軸141が重力でもって突出するようなことがない。一方、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131をアクチュエータ支持プレート105上に取り付けた状態では、自然にロックが解放され、セレクト用アクチュエータ133の動作が可能となる。
Therefore, when the transmission actuator unit 131 is removed from the actuator support plate 105 and lifted, the stopper pin 181 protrudes by the coil spring 185, and the select actuator 133 is locked. Therefore, the rack shaft 141 does not protrude due to gravity. On the other hand, when the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the actuator support plate 105, the lock is naturally released and the select actuator 133 can be operated.
突出位置におけるストッパピン181の突出長は、ベースプレート132の底面における3つの脚部176の突出長よりも短く設定されている。従って、取り外したトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を床面等に置いてもロックが外れることがない。また床面等との衝突によるストッパピン181の不要な損傷も回避される。
The protruding length of the stopper pin 181 at the protruding position is set shorter than the protruding length of the three legs 176 on the bottom surface of the base plate 132. Therefore, even if the removed transmission actuator unit 131 is placed on the floor or the like, the lock will not be released. In addition, unnecessary damage to the stopper pin 181 due to a collision with the floor surface or the like is avoided.
図6、図7等に示すように、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の上にトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131が取り付けられた状態では、ベースプレート132の延長部132aを含む前縁(コネクタカバー137側の縁部)の外形状がアクチュエータ支持プレート105の前縁形状にほぼ対応している。アクチュエータ支持プレート105の後縁側では、同様にベースプレート132の延長部132aを含む後縁(モータカバー138側の縁部)の外形状がアクチュエータ支持プレート105の後縁形状にほぼ対応している。右ハンドル車用の態様では使用されていない後側コネクタ123Bはモータカバー138部分のベースプレート132によって覆われている。つまり、使用されていない後側コネクタ123Bが露出することがない。
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, when the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the actuator support plate 105, the outside of the leading edge (edge on the connector cover 137 side) including the extension 132a of the base plate 132. The shape substantially corresponds to the shape of the leading edge of the actuator support plate 105. On the trailing edge side of the actuator support plate 105, the outer shape of the trailing edge (the edge on the motor cover 138 side) including the extension 132a of the base plate 132 substantially corresponds to the trailing edge shape of the actuator support plate 105. The rear connector 123B, which is not used in the right-hand drive vehicle aspect, is covered by the base plate 132 of the motor cover 138 portion. That is, the unused rear connector 123B is not exposed.
また、平面視においてアクチュエータ支持プレート105はメインフレーム15の内側にある。一方、車両幅方向にサブフレーム16から突出するアクチュエータハウジング135の左右両端部は、メインフレーム15のメインビーム15aよりも上方の高さ位置にある(図2等参照)。従って、アクチュエータハウジング135とメインビーム15aとが干渉することなく前述した可動ユニット101およびトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の上下・前後スライドが可能である。なお、可動ユニット101を最大限に後退させた位置および最大限に前進させた位置においても、アクチュエータハウジング135とメインビーム15aとが干渉しない関係に各部が設定されている。
Further, the actuator support plate 105 is inside the main frame 15 in a plan view. On the other hand, the left and right ends of the actuator housing 135 protruding from the subframe 16 in the vehicle width direction are located at heights above the main beam 15a of the main frame 15 (see FIG. 2 and the like). Therefore, the movable unit 101 and the transmission actuator unit 131 can be slid up and down and back and forth without interfering with the actuator housing 135 and the main beam 15a. Each part is set so that the actuator housing 135 and the main beam 15a do not interfere with each other even at the position where the movable unit 101 is retracted to the maximum and the position where the movable unit 101 is advanced to the maximum.
アクチュエータハウジング135の上面135aには、取り外したトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を作業者が持ち運びできるように、作業者によって把持可能な略U字形のハンドル136が取り付けられている。このハンドル136は、シフト用アクチュエータ134を含むトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131全体の重心位置に対応した位置に配置されている。従って、ハンドル136を介して持ち上げたときにトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131が大きく傾くことがなく、搬送作業が容易になることに加えて、可動ユニット101に対する脱着作業が容易となる。
A substantially U-shaped handle 136 that can be gripped by the operator is attached to the upper surface 135a of the actuator housing 135 so that the operator can carry the removed transmission actuator unit 131. The handle 136 is arranged at a position corresponding to the position of the center of gravity of the entire transmission actuator unit 131 including the shift actuator 134. Therefore, the transmission actuator unit 131 does not tilt significantly when lifted via the handle 136, facilitating the transport work and facilitating the attachment / detachment work to the movable unit 101.
上記のように、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131は、一対のロック機構143を緩めるだけで可動ユニット101から取り外すことが可能である。そして、逆に、可動ユニット101の上にトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を載せ、一対のロックピン144を手指で回転させてロック機構143をロック状態とすることで、可動ユニット101に取り付けることができる。取付と同時にコネクタ123,171による電気的接続がなされ、外部でのケーブルの接続等は不要である。
As described above, the transmission actuator unit 131 can be removed from the movable unit 101 simply by loosening the pair of lock mechanisms 143. Then, conversely, the transmission actuator unit 131 is placed on the movable unit 101, and the pair of lock pins 144 are rotated by fingers to lock the lock mechanism 143, so that the lock mechanism 143 can be attached to the movable unit 101. At the same time as the installation, the connectors 123 and 171 are electrically connected, and there is no need to connect an external cable.
従って、車両自動運転装置1を車両に搭載するに際して、フレーム11(可動ユニット101)からトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を取り外した状態としておき、フレーム11を運転席2上に固定・支持した後に車内でトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を可動ユニット101に取り付けることができる。逆に車両自動運転装置1を車両から取り外す際にも、先にトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を取り外すことが容易である。これにより、ドア開口部を通した車内への車両自動運転装置1の搬入・搬出が容易となる。トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を取り外した状態では、ストッパピン181を用いたストッパ機構182によってセレクト用アクチュエータ133のラック軸141が固定されるので、取り外したトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の取り扱いが容易となる。自重によるラック軸141の突出が生じないので、例えば不用意にラック軸141が突出してドア開口部を傷付けてしまうようなことがない。
Therefore, when the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is mounted on the vehicle, the transmission actuator unit 131 is left removed from the frame 11 (movable unit 101), the frame 11 is fixed and supported on the driver's seat 2, and then the transmission actuator is mounted in the vehicle. The unit 131 can be attached to the movable unit 101. On the contrary, when the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is removed from the vehicle, it is easy to remove the transmission actuator unit 131 first. As a result, the vehicle automatic driving device 1 can be easily carried in and out of the vehicle through the door opening. When the transmission actuator unit 131 is removed, the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133 is fixed by the stopper mechanism 182 using the stopper pin 181, so that the removed transmission actuator unit 131 can be easily handled. Since the rack shaft 141 does not protrude due to its own weight, for example, the rack shaft 141 does not inadvertently protrude and damage the door opening.
一方、可動ユニット101から取り外したトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131は、前後を180°反転させて可動ユニット101に取り付けることが可能である。これにより、シフトレバーが運転席2の右側に位置する車両つまりいわゆる左ハンドル車に容易に対応することができる。
On the other hand, the transmission actuator unit 131 removed from the movable unit 101 can be attached to the movable unit 101 by reversing the front and rear by 180 °. As a result, the shift lever can easily correspond to a vehicle located on the right side of the driver's seat 2, that is, a so-called left-hand drive vehicle.
右ハンドル車用におけるトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の取付姿勢に対してトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の取付姿勢を180°反転させた左ハンドル車用の態様では、図26、図27に示すように、モータカバー138が前側に、コネクタカバー137が後側に、それぞれ位置する。トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131に対角線上に配置された一対のロックピン144は、それぞれ右ハンドル車用の態様とは異なる対角線上のグロメット121と組み合わせられ、摘み部145による回転操作によってロックがなされる。つまり、前側グロメット121Aに第2ロックピン144Bが係合し、後側グロメット121Bに第1ロックピン144Aが係合する。
In the aspect for a left-hand drive vehicle in which the mounting posture of the transmission actuator unit 131 is reversed by 180 ° with respect to the mounting posture of the transmission actuator unit 131 for a right-hand drive vehicle, the motor cover 138 is used as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27. The connector cover 137 is located on the front side and the connector cover 137 is located on the rear side. The pair of lock pins 144 arranged diagonally on the transmission actuator unit 131 are combined with the diagonal grommet 121, which is different from the mode for right-hand drive vehicles, and are locked by the rotation operation by the knob 145. That is, the second lock pin 144B engages with the front grommet 121A, and the first lock pin 144A engages with the rear grommet 121B.
また、トランスミッションアクチュエータ側コネクタ171は、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の後側コネクタ123Bと接続される。このとき、使用されない前側コネクタ123Aは、ベースプレート132の開口部175に受容され、ベースプレート132との干渉が回避されるとともに、外部に露出することがない。さらに、ベースプレート132下面の3つの脚部176は、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の前側ロケート用開口部124Aおよび左右一対のロケート用切欠部125に比較的密に係合する。
Further, the transmission actuator side connector 171 is connected to the rear side connector 123B of the actuator support plate 105. At this time, the unused front connector 123A is received by the opening 175 of the base plate 132 to avoid interference with the base plate 132 and is not exposed to the outside. Further, the three legs 176 on the lower surface of the base plate 132 engage relatively tightly with the front locating opening 124A of the actuator support plate 105 and the pair of left and right locating notches 125.
なお、右ハンドル車用の取付姿勢と左ハンドル車用の取付姿勢のいずれでも、セレクト用アクチュエータ133のラック軸141の中心は、等しい位置にあり、互いに変化しない。つまり、アクチュエータ支持プレート105の前後方向中央に常にラック軸141が位置する。
The center of the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133 is at the same position in both the mounting posture for the right-hand drive vehicle and the mounting posture for the left-hand drive vehicle, and does not change from each other. That is, the rack shaft 141 is always located at the center of the actuator support plate 105 in the front-rear direction.
[シフト用アクチュエータ134の構成および着脱構造]
前述したようにシフト用アクチュエータ134は、セレクト用アクチュエータ133のラック軸141の先端部に支持されているが、このシフト用アクチュエータ134はラック軸141の先端部から簡単に着脱できる。さらに、セレクト用アクチュエータ133に対するシフト用アクチュエータ134の取付姿勢を前後反転可能なように構成されている。すなわち、上述した右ハンドル車用の態様と左ハンドル車用の態様との間での変更に伴ってトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の取付姿勢を180°反転させた場合に、多くの車種では、セレクト用アクチュエータ133のラック軸141よりもシフトレバーの位置が前側にあるので、シフト用アクチュエータ134の向き(つまりグリップハンド168が前後のどちら側にあるか)を変更する必要が生じる。本実施例では、シフト用アクチュエータ134の前後方向が容易に反転する。 [Structure and attachment / detachment structure of shift actuator 134]
As described above, theshift actuator 134 is supported by the tip of the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133, but the shift actuator 134 can be easily attached to and detached from the tip of the rack shaft 141. Further, the mounting posture of the shift actuator 134 with respect to the select actuator 133 can be reversed back and forth. That is, when the mounting posture of the transmission actuator unit 131 is reversed by 180 ° due to the change between the mode for the right-hand drive vehicle and the mode for the left-hand drive vehicle described above, the select actuator is used in many vehicle models. Since the position of the shift lever is on the front side of the rack shaft 141 of 133, it becomes necessary to change the direction of the shift actuator 134 (that is, which side the grip hand 168 is on the front or rear side). In this embodiment, the front-rear direction of the shift actuator 134 is easily reversed.
前述したようにシフト用アクチュエータ134は、セレクト用アクチュエータ133のラック軸141の先端部に支持されているが、このシフト用アクチュエータ134はラック軸141の先端部から簡単に着脱できる。さらに、セレクト用アクチュエータ133に対するシフト用アクチュエータ134の取付姿勢を前後反転可能なように構成されている。すなわち、上述した右ハンドル車用の態様と左ハンドル車用の態様との間での変更に伴ってトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の取付姿勢を180°反転させた場合に、多くの車種では、セレクト用アクチュエータ133のラック軸141よりもシフトレバーの位置が前側にあるので、シフト用アクチュエータ134の向き(つまりグリップハンド168が前後のどちら側にあるか)を変更する必要が生じる。本実施例では、シフト用アクチュエータ134の前後方向が容易に反転する。 [Structure and attachment / detachment structure of shift actuator 134]
As described above, the
図21および図22は、セレクト用アクチュエータ133からシフト用アクチュエータ134を取り外した状態を示している。なお、これらの図におけるシフト用アクチュエータ134の向き(セレクト用アクチュエータ133に対する姿勢)は、図1等のいわゆる右ハンドル車用の態様に相当する。
21 and 22 show a state in which the shift actuator 134 is removed from the select actuator 133. The orientation of the shift actuator 134 (posture with respect to the select actuator 133) in these figures corresponds to the mode for a so-called right-hand drive vehicle as shown in FIG.
セレクト用アクチュエータ133のアクチュエータハウジング135から進退するラック軸141は、角柱状をなしており、その先端部に、回転自在に支持されたジョイント152を介してL字形ブラケット151が取り付けられている。ジョイント152は、ラック軸141の長手方向と平行な回転中心軸を有し、L字形ブラケット151は、この回転中心軸を中心として揺動可能に支持されている。L字形ブラケット151は、ジョイント152の回転中心軸と平行な平面をなす長方形の取付面151aを有し、この取付面151aの両側に、該取付面151aから垂直に立ち上がった第1ガイド面151bおよび第2ガイド面151cを備えている。
The rack shaft 141 that advances and retreats from the actuator housing 135 of the select actuator 133 has a prismatic shape, and an L-shaped bracket 151 is attached to the tip thereof via a joint 152 that is rotatably supported. The joint 152 has a rotation center axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the rack shaft 141, and the L-shaped bracket 151 is swingably supported around the rotation center axis. The L-shaped bracket 151 has a rectangular mounting surface 151a forming a plane parallel to the rotation center axis of the joint 152, and on both sides of the mounting surface 151a, a first guide surface 151b rising vertically from the mounting surface 151a and A second guide surface 151c is provided.
ジョイント152の回転中心軸は、ラック軸141の下方にあり、かつ取付面151aは、ジョイント152の回転中心軸よりも下方にオフセットしている。従って、取付面151aは、ラック軸141の延長線上よりも下方に位置している。また、第1ガイド面151bおよび第2ガイド面151cは、ジョイント152の回転中心軸と直交する方向(換言すればラック軸141と直交する方向)に延びており、互いに平行である。
The rotation center axis of the joint 152 is below the rack shaft 141, and the mounting surface 151a is offset below the rotation center axis of the joint 152. Therefore, the mounting surface 151a is located below the extension line of the rack shaft 141. Further, the first guide surface 151b and the second guide surface 151c extend in a direction orthogonal to the rotation center axis of the joint 152 (in other words, a direction orthogonal to the rack axis 141) and are parallel to each other.
L字形ブラケット151の取付面151aの中心部には、ロック機構154を構成するロックピン155が配置されている。このロック機構154は、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を固定するための前述したロック機構143と実質的に同一の汎用のスクリュー形式のロック機構であって、ロックピン155の下端には手指で回転操作するための摘み部156を備えている。
A lock pin 155 constituting the lock mechanism 154 is arranged at the center of the mounting surface 151a of the L-shaped bracket 151. The lock mechanism 154 is a general-purpose screw-type lock mechanism substantially the same as the above-mentioned lock mechanism 143 for fixing the transmission actuator unit 131, and the lower end of the lock pin 155 is rotated by a finger. The knob portion 156 is provided.
図20~図23等に示すように、シフト用アクチュエータ134は、長方形の底面を有する箱状のアクチュエータハウジング161と、このアクチュエータハウジング161の内部に収容された減速機163と、この減速機163に接続された電動モータ165と、アクチュエータハウジング161の端部から先端部が突出したアクチュエータロッドとしてのラック軸166と、を備えている。ラック軸166は、歯部を除く基本形状として断面円形の棒状をなしている。アクチュエータハウジング161は、後方へと直線的に延びた円筒部161aを備えており、ラック軸166が後退位置にあるときはラック軸166の大部分がこの円筒部161aの中に収容されている。また、箱状をなすアクチュエータハウジング161の電動モータ165とは反対側となるコーナ部分は、傾斜面をなしている。
As shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 and the like, the shift actuator 134 includes a box-shaped actuator housing 161 having a rectangular bottom surface, a speed reducer 163 housed inside the actuator housing 161 and the speed reducer 163. It includes a connected electric motor 165 and a rack shaft 166 as an actuator rod whose tip protrudes from the end of the actuator housing 161. The rack shaft 166 has a rod shape with a circular cross section as a basic shape excluding the tooth portion. The actuator housing 161 includes a cylindrical portion 161a that extends linearly rearward, and when the rack shaft 166 is in the retracted position, most of the rack shaft 166 is housed in the cylindrical portion 161a. Further, the corner portion of the box-shaped actuator housing 161 opposite to the electric motor 165 has an inclined surface.
ラック軸166の先端に、前述したグリップハンド168が取り付けられている。このグリップハンド168は、二股状をなす固定フィンガー168aと、この固定フィンガー168aに対して開閉動作可能な可動フィンガー168bと、固定フィンガー168aに対する可動フィンガー168bの開閉動作ならびに締付固定を行う固定ネジ169と、を備えている。グリップハンド168は、図示しないシフトレバー頭部のノブないしグリップを把持するものであるが、固定ネジ169を介したフィンガー168a,168bの開閉調整によって、形状や大きさが異なる種々のノブないしグリップの把持が可能である。
The above-mentioned grip hand 168 is attached to the tip of the rack shaft 166. The grip hand 168 has a bifurcated fixed finger 168a, a movable finger 168b that can be opened and closed with respect to the fixed finger 168a, and a fixing screw 169 that opens and closes and tightens and fixes the movable finger 168b with respect to the fixed finger 168a. And have. The grip hand 168 grips a knob or grip on the head of a shift lever (not shown), but various knobs or grips having different shapes and sizes can be adjusted by opening and closing the fingers 168a and 168b via a fixing screw 169. It can be gripped.
アクチュエータハウジング161の底面は、剛性の高い比較的に厚肉の底部プレート161bによって構成されており、この底部プレート161bは、図22に示すように、ラック軸166の長手方向が長辺となる長方形をなしている。また、底部プレート161bの短辺側の幅は、上述したL字形ブラケット151の取付面151aの幅つまり第1ガイド面151bと第2ガイド面151cとの間の間隔に実質的に等しい。つまり、底部プレート161bは、L字形ブラケット151の第1,第2ガイド面151b,151cに挟まれた取付面151aに比較的密に嵌合し得る寸法を有している。そして、底部プレート161bの中心部には、ロックピン155が係合するロック孔162aを備えたグロメット162が取り付けられている。このグロメット162は、前述したアクチュエータ支持プレート105におけるグロメット121と同様のものであり、ロックピン155とともにロック機構154を構成している。
The bottom surface of the actuator housing 161 is composed of a relatively thick bottom plate 161b having high rigidity, and the bottom plate 161b is a rectangle having a long side in the longitudinal direction of the rack shaft 166 as shown in FIG. Is doing. Further, the width of the bottom plate 161b on the short side is substantially equal to the width of the mounting surface 151a of the L-shaped bracket 151 described above, that is, the distance between the first guide surface 151b and the second guide surface 151c. That is, the bottom plate 161b has dimensions that can be relatively tightly fitted to the mounting surfaces 151a sandwiched between the first and second guide surfaces 151b and 151c of the L-shaped bracket 151. A grommet 162 having a lock hole 162a with which the lock pin 155 is engaged is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 161b. The grommet 162 is the same as the grommet 121 in the actuator support plate 105 described above, and constitutes the lock mechanism 154 together with the lock pin 155.
従って、アクチュエータハウジング161をL字形ブラケット151の上に載せ、ロックピン155を摘み部156を介して手指でロック方向に回転操作することにより、底部プレート161bがL字形ブラケット151の取付面151a上に締め付けられる。これにより、シフト用アクチュエータ134がL字形ブラケット151上に固定される。この取付状態では、底部プレート161bの左右側縁がL字形ブラケット151の第1,第2ガイド面151b,151cに係合するので、シフト用アクチュエータ134が左右に傾くようなことはない。つまり、セレクト用アクチュエータ133のラック軸141とシフト用アクチュエータ134のラック軸166は、常に正しく直交状態を維持する。なお、ラック軸166中心軸線は、L字形ブラケット151の揺動中心つまりジョイント152の回転中心軸と交差する。従って、先端にグリップハンド168を備えたラック軸166は、該ラック軸166の中心軸線上にある揺動中心を中心として上下に揺動可能である。
Therefore, by placing the actuator housing 161 on the L-shaped bracket 151 and rotating the lock pin 155 in the locking direction with the fingers via the knob portion 156, the bottom plate 161b is placed on the mounting surface 151a of the L-shaped bracket 151. It is tightened. As a result, the shift actuator 134 is fixed on the L-shaped bracket 151. In this mounted state, the left and right side edges of the bottom plate 161b engage with the first and second guide surfaces 151b and 151c of the L-shaped bracket 151, so that the shift actuator 134 does not tilt to the left or right. That is, the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133 and the rack shaft 166 of the shift actuator 134 always maintain a correct orthogonal state at all times. The rack shaft 166 center axis intersects the swing center of the L-shaped bracket 151, that is, the rotation center axis of the joint 152. Therefore, the rack shaft 166 having the grip hand 168 at the tip can swing up and down about the swing center on the central axis of the rack shaft 166.
また、L字形ブラケット151下面にある摘み部156をロック解除方向に回転操作すれば、ロック機構154のロックが解除され、図21、図22に示すようにシフト用アクチュエータ134をL字形ブラケット151から取り外すことができる。そして、取り外したシフト用アクチュエータ134を前後に180°反転させてL字形ブラケット151に再度取り付けることで、図26、図27に示すような逆向きの取付姿勢でもってセレクト用アクチュエータ133と組み合わせることができる。
Further, when the knob portion 156 on the lower surface of the L-shaped bracket 151 is rotated in the unlocking direction, the lock mechanism 154 is unlocked, and the shift actuator 134 is moved from the L-shaped bracket 151 as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. Can be removed. Then, by reversing the removed shift actuator 134 back and forth by 180 ° and reattaching it to the L-shaped bracket 151, it is possible to combine it with the select actuator 133 in the opposite mounting posture as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27. can.
グロメット162のロック孔162aは、アクチュエータハウジング161下面の底部プレート161bの中心、少なくとも底部プレート161bの短辺方向に沿った幅の中心に位置している。従って、シフト用アクチュエータ134を180°反転させた取付姿勢においても、底部プレート161bはL字形ブラケット151の第1,第2ガイド面151b,151c間の取付面151aに比較的密に嵌合し、かつロックピン155がロック孔162aに合致する。
The lock hole 162a of the grommet 162 is located at the center of the bottom plate 161b on the lower surface of the actuator housing 161 at least at the center of the width along the short side direction of the bottom plate 161b. Therefore, even in the mounting posture in which the shift actuator 134 is inverted by 180 °, the bottom plate 161b is relatively tightly fitted to the mounting surface 151a between the first and second guide surfaces 151b and 151c of the L-shaped bracket 151. And the lock pin 155 matches the lock hole 162a.
なお、図17、図18等に示すように、セレクト用アクチュエータ133とシフト用アクチュエータ134とは、セレクト用アクチュエータ133のラック軸141先端部からシフト用アクチュエータ134の電動モータ165へ至る2本のケーブル167によって接続されている。このケーブル167は、L字形ブラケット151からシフト用アクチュエータ134を取り外して姿勢を反転させるに必要な最小限の長さを備えている。従って、基本的にケーブル167を取り外すことなくシフト用アクチュエータ134の姿勢の反転作業が可能である。必要であれば、ケーブル167をシフト用アクチュエータ134から取り外すことも可能である。
As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the select actuator 133 and the shift actuator 134 are two cables from the tip of the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133 to the electric motor 165 of the shift actuator 134. It is connected by 167. The cable 167 has a minimum length required for removing the shift actuator 134 from the L-shaped bracket 151 and reversing the posture. Therefore, basically, the posture of the shift actuator 134 can be reversed without removing the cable 167. If desired, the cable 167 can also be removed from the shift actuator 134.
ケーブル167は、セレクト用アクチュエータ133のラック軸141の内部を通して延びており、最終的に、ベースプレート132下面のコネクタ171に接続されている。従って、外部に露出しているケーブル167の長さは最小限のものとなっている。
The cable 167 extends through the inside of the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133, and is finally connected to the connector 171 on the lower surface of the base plate 132. Therefore, the length of the cable 167 exposed to the outside is minimized.
図23は、ラック軸166の中心軸に沿った断面におけるシフト用アクチュエータ134の断面図である。詳しくは、L字形ブラケット151上にロック機構154を介して固定支持されている状態の断面を示している。シフト用アクチュエータ134は、電動モータ165および減速機163の作用によりアクチュエータロッドとなるラック軸166が車両前後方向に移動するピニオン・ラック形式の直線運動型アクチュエータである。図示するように、箱状をなすアクチュエータハウジング161の内側には、複数の歯車164を組み合わせた減速歯車列からなる減速機163が収容されており、電動モータ165の回転を減速している。ラック軸166には、歯車列の最終段のピニオンと噛み合うラック166aが形成されている。
FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the shift actuator 134 in a cross section along the central axis of the rack shaft 166. Specifically, the cross section of the state where it is fixedly supported on the L-shaped bracket 151 via the lock mechanism 154 is shown. The shift actuator 134 is a pinion rack type linear motion actuator in which the rack shaft 166, which is an actuator rod, moves in the front-rear direction of the vehicle by the action of the electric motor 165 and the speed reducer 163. As shown in the figure, a speed reducer 163 composed of a speed reduction gear train in which a plurality of gears 164 are combined is housed inside the box-shaped actuator housing 161 to reduce the rotation of the electric motor 165. The rack shaft 166 is formed with a rack 166a that meshes with the pinion at the final stage of the gear train.
上記のように、実施例の車両自動運転装置1にあっては、トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131全体を2つの取付姿勢の中のいずれかで選択的に可動ユニット101上に取り付けるとともに、このトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131の取付姿勢に対応してセレクト用アクチュエータ133に対するシフト用アクチュエータ134の取付姿勢を変更することで、運転席2に対してシフトレバーが左側に位置するいわゆる右ハンドル車用の態様と、運転席2に対してシフトレバーが右側に位置するいわゆる左ハンドル車用の態様と、に容易に変更することができる。
As described above, in the vehicle automatic driving device 1 of the embodiment, the entire transmission actuator unit 131 is selectively mounted on the movable unit 101 in one of the two mounting postures, and the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted on the movable unit 101. By changing the mounting posture of the shifting actuator 134 with respect to the selecting actuator 133 according to the mounting posture of the driver's seat 2, the mode for a so-called right-hand drive vehicle in which the shift lever is located on the left side with respect to the driver's seat 2 and the driver's seat 2 It can be easily changed to the mode for a so-called left-hand drive vehicle in which the shift lever is located on the right side.
図5、図6は、右ハンドル車用の態様を示しており、フレーム11の左側にグリップハンド168が位置する。グリップハンド168は、セレクト用アクチュエータ133のアクチュエータハウジング135よりも前方に位置する。トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131のセレクト用アクチュエータ133とシフト用アクチュエータ134とは、図17、図18に示すような態様で組み合わせられている。
5 and 6 show a mode for a right-hand drive vehicle, in which the grip hand 168 is located on the left side of the frame 11. The grip hand 168 is located in front of the actuator housing 135 of the select actuator 133. The select actuator 133 of the transmission actuator unit 131 and the shift actuator 134 are combined in the manner shown in FIGS. 17 and 18.
これに対し、図26、図27は、左ハンドル車用の態様を示しており、フレーム11の右側にグリップハンド168が位置する。グリップハンド168は、やはりセレクト用アクチュエータ133のアクチュエータハウジング135よりも前方に位置する。トランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131のセレクト用アクチュエータ133とシフト用アクチュエータ134とは、図示するようにシフト用アクチュエータ134を反転させた態様で組み合わせられている。
On the other hand, FIGS. 26 and 27 show an aspect for a left-hand drive vehicle, in which the grip hand 168 is located on the right side of the frame 11. The grip hand 168 is also located in front of the actuator housing 135 of the select actuator 133. The select actuator 133 of the transmission actuator unit 131 and the shift actuator 134 are combined in an inverted manner as shown in the figure.
さらに、図示は省略するが、グリップハンド168がセレクト用アクチュエータ133のアクチュエータハウジング135よりも後方に位置するようにシフト用アクチュエータ134の取付姿勢を選択することも可能である。例えば、運転席2の左側にシフトレバーが位置する右ハンドル車用の態様として図1のようにトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131を搭載した上で、シフトレバーが運転席2に対して比較的に後方寄りに位置する場合に、シフト用アクチュエータ134を前後反転した形でセレクト用アクチュエータ133に組み合わせることができる。これにより、グリップハンド168が相対的に後方位置となる。
Further, although not shown, it is also possible to select the mounting posture of the shift actuator 134 so that the grip hand 168 is located behind the actuator housing 135 of the select actuator 133. For example, as a mode for a right-hand drive vehicle in which the shift lever is located on the left side of the driver's seat 2, the transmission actuator unit 131 is mounted as shown in FIG. When positioned, the shift actuator 134 can be combined with the select actuator 133 in a front-rear inverted manner. As a result, the grip hand 168 is relatively rearward.
このような構成は、左ハンドル車用の態様においても同様であり、例えば図26の左ハンドル車用の態様においてシフト用アクチュエータ134を前後反転した形で組み合わせることが可能である。
Such a configuration is the same in the mode for a left-hand drive vehicle. For example, in the mode for a left-hand drive vehicle shown in FIG. 26, the shift actuator 134 can be combined in a front-rear inverted manner.
前述したようにセレクト用アクチュエータ133の高さ位置ないし前後位置は可動ユニット101のフレーム11に対するスライド位置によって変更可能であるので、シフト用アクチュエータ134の前後の向きの変更と組み合わせることで、多様なシフトレバー位置に対応が可能である。
As described above, the height position or the front-rear position of the select actuator 133 can be changed by the slide position of the movable unit 101 with respect to the frame 11. Therefore, by combining with the change of the front-rear direction of the shift actuator 134, various shifts can be made. It is possible to correspond to the lever position.
また、シフトレバーの頭部の高さ位置は、一般にシフト操作に伴って上下に変位するが、シフト用アクチュエータ134がジョイント152の回転中心軸を中心として上下に揺動可能であるので、シフトレバーの頭部の高さ位置の変化が許容される。従って、円滑なシフト操作が可能である。
Further, the height position of the head of the shift lever is generally displaced up and down with the shift operation, but since the shift actuator 134 can swing up and down around the rotation center axis of the joint 152, the shift lever Changes in the height position of the head are allowed. Therefore, a smooth shift operation is possible.
[可動ユニット101の変形例]
図39~図41は、可動ユニット101の変形例として、シフトレバーの頭部の高さ位置が比較的高く斜めに操作する必要がある場合(例えば、運転席前方のダッシュパネルに短いシフトレバーが配置されている形式など)に対応できるように、チルト機構を備えた可動ユニット101を示している。 [Modification example of movable unit 101]
39 to 41 show, as a modification of themovable unit 101, when the height position of the head of the shift lever is relatively high and it is necessary to operate it diagonally (for example, a short shift lever is attached to the dash panel in front of the driver's seat. The movable unit 101 provided with the tilt mechanism is shown so as to correspond to the arranged form and the like.
図39~図41は、可動ユニット101の変形例として、シフトレバーの頭部の高さ位置が比較的高く斜めに操作する必要がある場合(例えば、運転席前方のダッシュパネルに短いシフトレバーが配置されている形式など)に対応できるように、チルト機構を備えた可動ユニット101を示している。 [Modification example of movable unit 101]
39 to 41 show, as a modification of the
この可動ユニット101においては、一対のサイドフレーム103の各々が、アウターサイドフレーム103Aとインナーサイドフレーム103Bとを組み合わせた構成となっている。アウターサイドフレーム103Aは、車両幅方向の外側に位置し、前述したサイドフレーム103と同様に3つの辺103Aa,103Ab,103Acを有する略三角形をなし、かつ、上方の辺103Aaがアクチュエータ支持プレート105に固定されている。
In this movable unit 101, each of the pair of side frames 103 has a configuration in which the outer side frame 103A and the inner side frame 103B are combined. The outer side frame 103A is located outside in the vehicle width direction, forms a substantially triangle having three sides 103Aa, 103Ab, 103Ac like the side frame 103 described above, and the upper side 103Aa is attached to the actuator support plate 105. It is fixed.
インナーサイドフレーム103Bは、アウターサイドフレーム103Aの車両幅方向の内側面に沿って重ねられており、3つの辺103Ba,103Bb,103Bcを有する相対的に小さな略三角形をなしている。スライダカバープレート111(前後2つのスライダ110および固定ネジ113を含む)は、インナーサイドフレーム103Bの底辺103Bcに取り付けられている。従って、インナーサイドフレーム103Bがサブビーム16aによって前後スライド可能に案内される。
The inner side frame 103B is overlapped along the inner side surface of the outer side frame 103A in the vehicle width direction, and forms a relatively small substantially triangle having three sides 103Ba, 103Bb, 103Bc. The slider cover plate 111 (including the two front and rear sliders 110 and the fixing screw 113) is attached to the bottom 103Bc of the inner side frame 103B. Therefore, the inner side frame 103B is guided by the sub-beam 16a so as to be slidable back and forth.
アウターサイドフレーム103Aとインナーサイドフレーム103Bとは、後方の頂点においてヒンジピン186を介して互いに揺動可能に連結されている。アウターサイドフレーム103Aの下方の頂点にロックネジ187が設けられており、インナーサイドフレーム103Bの前方の辺103Bbの上下2箇所に配置された第1グロメット188Aもしくは第2グロメット188Bに、このロックネジ187が螺合する。つまり、ロックネジ187が螺合するグロメット188をいずれかに選択することによって、スライダ110(換言すれば可動ユニット101を案内するサブビーム16a)に対するアウターサイドフレーム103Aの傾斜角度を変更することができる。
The outer side frame 103A and the inner side frame 103B are swingably connected to each other via a hinge pin 186 at the rear apex. A lock screw 187 is provided at the lower apex of the outer side frame 103A, and the lock screw 187 is screwed onto the first grommet 188A or the second grommet 188B arranged at two locations above and below the front side 103Bb of the inner side frame 103B. It fits. That is, by selecting the grommet 188 into which the lock screw 187 is screwed, the inclination angle of the outer side frame 103A with respect to the slider 110 (in other words, the sub-beam 16a that guides the movable unit 101) can be changed.
ロックネジ187が下方の第1グロメット188Aに螺合した状態では、アクチュエータ支持プレート105は基本的に水平姿勢となる。従って、シフト用アクチュエータ134は、基本的に水平姿勢となる。
When the lock screw 187 is screwed into the lower first grommet 188A, the actuator support plate 105 is basically in a horizontal position. Therefore, the shift actuator 134 is basically in a horizontal posture.
これに対し、ロックネジ187が第2グロメット188Bに螺合した状態では、アクチュエータ支持プレート105は前縁側が相対的に高位となる傾斜姿勢となる。従って、シフト用アクチュエータ134は、同様に傾斜した姿勢となる。一つの例では、例えば30°程度の角度でもってアクチュエータ支持プレート105を傾斜させることができる。これにより、例えば、シフトレバーがダッシュパネルに配置されているような形式であっても、斜め上方および斜め下方へシフト操作することができる。
On the other hand, when the lock screw 187 is screwed into the second grommet 188B, the actuator support plate 105 is in an inclined posture in which the front edge side is relatively high. Therefore, the shift actuator 134 is similarly tilted. In one example, the actuator support plate 105 can be tilted at an angle of, for example, about 30 °. Thereby, for example, even if the shift lever is arranged on the dash panel, the shift operation can be performed diagonally upward and diagonally downward.
なお、図示例では、傾斜角度が2段階に変更されるが、グロメット188をより多数配置し、さらに多段階に角度変更が可能となるように構成することもできる。
In the illustrated example, the tilt angle is changed in two stages, but it is also possible to arrange a larger number of grommets 188 so that the angle can be changed in more stages.
[シフト用アクチュエータ134の支持部の変形例]
前述したように、実施例のトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131においては、セレクト用アクチュエータ133の高さ位置に対するシフト用アクチュエータ134の高さ位置が固定的に定まっているが、より多様なシフトレバーの頭部位置に簡単に対応できるように、セレクト用アクチュエータ133に対するシフト用アクチュエータ134の高さ位置を変更可能とすることもできる。 [Modification example of the support part of the shift actuator 134]
As described above, in thetransmission actuator unit 131 of the embodiment, the height position of the shift actuator 134 with respect to the height position of the select actuator 133 is fixedly determined, but the head positions of the shift levers are more diverse. It is also possible to change the height position of the shift actuator 134 with respect to the select actuator 133 so that the above can be easily dealt with.
前述したように、実施例のトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131においては、セレクト用アクチュエータ133の高さ位置に対するシフト用アクチュエータ134の高さ位置が固定的に定まっているが、より多様なシフトレバーの頭部位置に簡単に対応できるように、セレクト用アクチュエータ133に対するシフト用アクチュエータ134の高さ位置を変更可能とすることもできる。 [Modification example of the support part of the shift actuator 134]
As described above, in the
図42~図44は、このようなシフト用アクチュエータ134の支持部の変形例を示している。前述した実施例と同様に、セレクト用アクチュエータ133のラック軸141の先端に、回転自在に支持されたジョイント152Aを介してL字形ブラケット151Aが取り付けられているが、図42に示すように、両者が上下にスライド可能に組み合わされている。例えば、ジョイント152Aが上下方向に沿ったガイド溝221を有し、L字形ブラケット151Aには、このガイド溝221に対応した上下方向に沿ったガイドレール部222が形成されている。このガイドレール部222がガイド溝221にスライド可能に係合することで、L字形ブラケット151Aはジョイント152Aに対し上下に移動することができる。
FIGS. 42 to 44 show a modified example of the support portion of the shift actuator 134. Similar to the above-described embodiment, the L-shaped bracket 151A is attached to the tip of the rack shaft 141 of the select actuator 133 via the rotatably supported joint 152A. As shown in FIG. 42, both are attached. Are combined so that they can slide up and down. For example, the joint 152A has a guide groove 221 along the vertical direction, and the L-shaped bracket 151A is formed with a guide rail portion 222 corresponding to the guide groove 221 along the vertical direction. The guide rail portion 222 is slidably engaged with the guide groove 221 so that the L-shaped bracket 151A can move up and down with respect to the joint 152A.
また、ジョイント152Aの前端面にプランジャ223が取り付けられており、このプランジャ223の先端部が進入する係合孔224がガイドレール部222の前縁の複数箇所例えば3箇所に形成されている。つまり、高さの異なる3箇所に係合孔224が配置されている。プランジャ223は、図示せぬ内部のスプリングによって係合孔224と係合する方向に常に付勢されている。
Further, a plunger 223 is attached to the front end surface of the joint 152A, and engagement holes 224 into which the tip end portion of the plunger 223 enters are formed at a plurality of locations, for example, three locations on the front edge of the guide rail portion 222. That is, the engaging holes 224 are arranged at three locations having different heights. The plunger 223 is always urged in a direction of engaging with the engagement hole 224 by an internal spring (not shown).
図42は、L字形ブラケット151Aが最も低い位置にある状態を示しており、プランジャ223は、最も高い位置にある係合孔224に係合している。なお、この位置では、シフト用アクチュエータ134のラック軸166の中心線がジョイント152Aの回転中心軸と交差する。この状態から作業者が手指によりプランジャ223を引っ張って係合孔224との係合を解除すれば、L字形ブラケット151Aの高さ位置を上方の第2の位置もしくは第3の位置へと容易に変更することができる。例えば、図43は、L字形ブラケット151Aが最も高い位置にある状態を示しており、プランジャ223は、最も低い位置にある係合孔224に係合している。
FIG. 42 shows a state in which the L-shaped bracket 151A is in the lowest position, and the plunger 223 is engaged with the engagement hole 224 in the highest position. At this position, the center line of the rack shaft 166 of the shift actuator 134 intersects the rotation center axis of the joint 152A. If the operator pulls the plunger 223 with his / her fingers to release the engagement with the engagement hole 224 from this state, the height position of the L-shaped bracket 151A can be easily moved to the upper second position or the third position. Can be changed. For example, FIG. 43 shows the state in which the L-shaped bracket 151A is in the highest position, and the plunger 223 is engaged with the engagement hole 224 in the lowest position.
従って、セレクト用アクチュエータ133の高さ位置に対するシフト用アクチュエータ134の高さ位置を3段階に簡単に調節することができる。
Therefore, the height position of the shift actuator 134 with respect to the height position of the select actuator 133 can be easily adjusted in three stages.
[ペダルアクチュエータ41の着脱構造]
前述したように、実施例の車両自動運転装置1は、3つのペダルアクチュエータ41、すなわち、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aと、ブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bと、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cと、を備えている。そして、これらのペダルアクチュエータ41は、フレーム11の前端に取り付けられたペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31に、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51を介して支持されている。 [Pedal actuator 41 attachment / detachment structure]
As described above, the vehicleautomatic driving device 1 of the embodiment includes three pedal actuators 41, that is, an accelerator pedal actuator 41A, a brake pedal actuator 41B, and a clutch pedal actuator 41C. These pedal actuators 41 are supported by the pedal actuator support slide rail 31 attached to the front end of the frame 11 via the pedal actuator support 51.
前述したように、実施例の車両自動運転装置1は、3つのペダルアクチュエータ41、すなわち、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aと、ブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bと、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cと、を備えている。そして、これらのペダルアクチュエータ41は、フレーム11の前端に取り付けられたペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31に、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51を介して支持されている。 [
As described above, the vehicle
図32は、フレーム11の前端に配置されたペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31とペダルアクチュエータサポート51の詳細を示している。また、図28~図30は、ペダルアクチュエータ41の代表的な構成として、ブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bの詳細を示している。
FIG. 32 shows the details of the pedal actuator support slide rail 31 and the pedal actuator support 51 arranged at the front end of the frame 11. Further, FIGS. 28 to 30 show the details of the brake pedal actuator 41B as a typical configuration of the pedal actuator 41.
ペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31は車両幅方向に細長く延びた帯状をなしており、比較的厚く剛性を有する金属板からなる。そして、軽量化のために不要な部分の肉抜きおよび開口部の形成が施されており、上縁部分および下縁部分が断面半円の棒状をなしている。このスライドレール31の上縁には、半円筒面をなす第1ガイド面31aが車両幅方向に連続して形成されており、スライドレール31の下縁には、半円筒面をなす第2ガイド面31bが車両幅方向に連続して形成されている。第1ガイド面31aと第2ガイド面31bは、互いに逆向きの半円形断面を有している。
The slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator has a strip shape extending in the vehicle width direction, and is made of a relatively thick and rigid metal plate. Then, in order to reduce the weight, unnecessary parts are lightened and openings are formed, and the upper edge portion and the lower edge portion form a rod shape with a semicircular cross section. A first guide surface 31a forming a semi-cylindrical surface is continuously formed on the upper edge of the slide rail 31 in the vehicle width direction, and a second guide forming a semi-cylindrical surface is formed on the lower edge of the slide rail 31. The surfaces 31b are continuously formed in the vehicle width direction. The first guide surface 31a and the second guide surface 31b have semicircular cross sections that are opposite to each other.
ペダルアクチュエータサポート51は、例えば硬質合成樹脂を用いて各部一体に成形されたものであって、正面視(車両前方から見た状態をいう)において、スライドレール31の上下に亘る寸法を有する縦長の長方形状をなしている。ペダルアクチュエータサポート51は、スライドレール31の前面に重なる矩形の基部51aを有するとともに、第1ガイド面31aの上方において車両後方へ延びる上部壁51bと、第2ガイド面31bの下方において車両後方へ延びる下部壁51cと、左右一対の側壁51dと、を備えている。換言すれば、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51は、スライドレール31へ向かう背面が開口した箱状に形成されている。一対の側壁51dは、第1ガイド面31aにスライド可能に係合する半円形の上部切欠部51eと、第2ガイド面31bにスライド可能に係合する半円形の下部切欠部51fと、を有する。これらの切欠部51e,51fが第1,第2ガイド面31a,31bに係合することで、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51はペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31にスライド可能に支持されている。
The pedal actuator support 51 is formed by integrally molding each part using, for example, a hard synthetic resin, and has a vertically long length having dimensions extending above and below the slide rail 31 in a front view (meaning a state seen from the front of the vehicle). It has a rectangular shape. The pedal actuator support 51 has a rectangular base 51a that overlaps the front surface of the slide rail 31, an upper wall 51b that extends rearward of the vehicle above the first guide surface 31a, and an upper wall 51b that extends rearward of the vehicle below the second guide surface 31b. It includes a lower wall 51c and a pair of left and right side walls 51d. In other words, the pedal actuator support 51 is formed in a box shape having an open back surface toward the slide rail 31. The pair of side walls 51d has a semi-circular upper notch 51e that is slidably engaged with the first guide surface 31a and a semi-circular lower notch 51f that is slidably engaged with the second guide surface 31b. .. By engaging these notches 51e and 51f with the first and second guide surfaces 31a and 31b, the pedal actuator support 51 is slidably supported by the pedal actuator supporting slide rail 31.
従って、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41A、ブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41B、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cの各々を、車種毎に異なる各ペダル45,46,47の位置に対応するように、車室内において、車両幅方向に容易に位置調整することができる。なお、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51は、スライドレール31の両端から切欠部51e,51fを噛み合わせながら該スライドレール31の長手方向(車両幅方向)に沿って挿入可能である。
Therefore, each of the accelerator pedal actuator 41A, the brake pedal actuator 41B, and the clutch pedal actuator 41C can be easily positioned in the vehicle interior in the vehicle width direction so as to correspond to the positions of the pedals 45, 46, and 47, which are different for each vehicle type. Can be adjusted. The pedal actuator support 51 can be inserted along the longitudinal direction (vehicle width direction) of the slide rail 31 while engaging the notches 51e and 51f from both ends of the slide rail 31.
また、箱状をなすペダルアクチュエータサポート51の下部には、コネクタ収容部51gが基部51aから前方へ張り出すようにして一体に形成されている。コネクタ収容部51gは、基部51a側の下部壁51cが前方へ延びており、この下部壁51cの前端から上方へ立ち上がった前部壁51hを有するとともに、左右一対の側壁51jを有している。これらの下部壁51c、前部壁51hおよび一対の側壁51jによって、コネクタ収容部51gは、上面が上方へ向かって開口した箱状に構成されており、このコネクタ収容部51gの内部空間に、サポート側コネクタ53がそれぞれ収容されている。サポート側コネクタ53は、上述したトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット用コネクタ123等と同様の構成であり、相手側との間で多少の位置ズレを許容し得るように端子片が浮動状態に構成されているとともに、挿入時の案内を行うためのガイドピン53aおよびガイドスリーブ53bを備えた形式となっている。図32に示すように、サポート側コネクタ53は、上方へ向かって配置されており、つまり挿入方向となるガイドピン53aおよびガイドスリーブ53bが上下方向に沿っている。
Further, at the lower part of the box-shaped pedal actuator support 51, a connector accommodating portion 51g is integrally formed so as to project forward from the base portion 51a. The connector accommodating portion 51g has a lower wall 51c on the base 51a side extending forward, has a front wall 51h rising upward from the front end of the lower wall 51c, and has a pair of left and right side walls 51j. The lower wall 51c, the front wall 51h, and the pair of side walls 51j form the connector accommodating portion 51g in a box shape having an upper surface opened upward, and the connector accommodating portion 51g is supported in the internal space of the connector accommodating portion 51g. Each side connector 53 is housed. The support-side connector 53 has the same configuration as the transmission actuator unit connector 123 and the like described above, and the terminal pieces are configured to float so as to allow some positional deviation from the mating side. The type is provided with a guide pin 53a and a guide sleeve 53b for guiding at the time of insertion. As shown in FIG. 32, the support side connector 53 is arranged upward, that is, the guide pin 53a and the guide sleeve 53b in the insertion direction are along the vertical direction.
なお、サポート側コネクタ53から後方へ図示しないケーブルが引き出されており、このケーブルは、スライドレール31の開口部を通って接続ボックス106へと延びている。
A cable (not shown) is pulled out from the support side connector 53 to the rear, and this cable extends to the connection box 106 through the opening of the slide rail 31.
コネクタ収容部51gの側壁51jは、基部51a側縁に沿った側壁51dよりも僅かに車両幅方向外側に位置する。つまり、側壁51dと側壁51jとの間には所定の段差があり、この段差を利用して、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51の側面に、上下方向に沿った凹溝部52が形成されている。換言すれば、コネクタ収容部51gの側壁51jの面から車両幅方向に凹んだ形に凹溝部52が形成されている。凹溝部52は、コネクタ収容部51gの上縁から下方へ向かって延び、コネクタ収容部51gの側面に入り込むようにして形成されている。またコネクタ収容部51gよりも上方の部分では、コネクタ収容部51gの側壁51jを上方へ細長く延長してなる突条部51jaによって、凹溝部52に連続するように相対的に凹んだガイド部52aが構成されている。凹溝部52の底面およびこれに連続したガイド部52aの底面は、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51の側壁51dの一部を構成している。また、ガイド部52aに隣接する突条部51jaの側面によって、凹溝部52の側面に連続したガイド面52bが形成されている。
The side wall 51j of the connector accommodating portion 51g is located slightly outside the side wall 51d along the side edge of the base portion 51a in the vehicle width direction. That is, there is a predetermined step between the side wall 51d and the side wall 51j, and a concave groove portion 52 along the vertical direction is formed on the side surface of the pedal actuator support 51 by utilizing this step. In other words, the concave groove portion 52 is formed in a shape recessed in the vehicle width direction from the surface of the side wall 51j of the connector accommodating portion 51g. The concave groove portion 52 is formed so as to extend downward from the upper edge of the connector accommodating portion 51g and enter the side surface of the connector accommodating portion 51g. Further, in the portion above the connector accommodating portion 51g, the guide portion 52a relatively recessed so as to be continuous with the concave groove portion 52 is provided by the ridge portion 51ja formed by extending the side wall 51j of the connector accommodating portion 51g upward. It is configured. The bottom surface of the concave groove portion 52 and the bottom surface of the guide portion 52a continuous with the recessed groove portion 52 form a part of the side wall 51d of the pedal actuator support 51. Further, the side surface of the ridge portion 51ja adjacent to the guide portion 52a forms a continuous guide surface 52b on the side surface of the concave groove portion 52.
スライドレール31の第2ガイド面31bにスライド可能に係合する半円形の下部切欠部51fは、厳密にはコネクタ収容部51gの側壁51jに形成されている。
Strictly speaking, the semicircular lower notch 51f that slidably engages with the second guide surface 31b of the slide rail 31 is formed on the side wall 51j of the connector accommodating portion 51g.
ペダルアクチュエータサポート51の上部壁51bの中央部には、ペダルアクチュエータ41用の後述するロック機構65の一部となるグロメット54が取り付けられている。このグロメット54は、前述したアクチュエータ支持プレート105におけるグロメット121やシフト用アクチュエータ134におけるグロメット162と同様のものであり、前方へ向かってロック孔54aが開口している。
A grommet 54, which is a part of a lock mechanism 65 described later for the pedal actuator 41, is attached to the central portion of the upper wall 51b of the pedal actuator support 51. The grommet 54 is similar to the grommet 121 in the actuator support plate 105 and the grommet 162 in the shift actuator 134 described above, and the lock hole 54a opens forward.
図31、図34に示すように、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51には、各々のペダルアクチュエータ41のペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61が着脱可能に取り付けられ、該ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61を介してペダルアクチュエータ41が支持される。
As shown in FIGS. 31 and 34, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 of each pedal actuator 41 is detachably attached to the pedal actuator support 51, and the pedal actuator 41 is supported via the pedal actuator support bracket 61. NS.
ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61は、図28~図30および図33に示されている。ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61は、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51と同様に、例えば硬質合成樹脂を用いて各部一体に成形されたものであって、正面視(車両前方から見た状態をいう)において、スライドレール31の上下に亘る寸法を有する縦長の長方形状をなしている。基本的に、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61は、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51と組み合わせたときに両者が略直方体の形状をなすように、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51に対して相補な形状を有している。図33、図30に示すように、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61は、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51の上部壁51bの上に重なる上部壁61aと、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51の側壁51dの上に重なるとともにコネクタ収容部51gの側壁51jと同一平面を呈する左右一対の側壁61bと、これら上部壁61aと側壁61bとに接続した前部壁61cと、を有し、後方(背面)および下方(下面)が開放された箱状をなしている。前部壁61cは、アクチュエータサポート51側のコネクタ収容部51gの前部壁51hと連続して同一平面を呈するように形成されている。
The pedal actuator support bracket 61 is shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 and 33. Like the pedal actuator support 51, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is integrally molded of each part using, for example, a hard synthetic resin, and the slide rail 31 is viewed from the front (meaning a state viewed from the front of the vehicle). It has a vertically long rectangular shape with dimensions extending above and below. Basically, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 has a shape complementary to the pedal actuator support 51 so that both of them form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape when combined with the pedal actuator support 51. As shown in FIGS. 33 and 30, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 overlaps the upper wall 61a that overlaps the upper wall 51b of the pedal actuator support 51 and the side wall 51d of the pedal actuator support 51, and the connector accommodating portion 51g. A box having a pair of left and right side walls 61b that are flush with the side wall 51j and a front wall 61c connected to the upper wall 61a and the side wall 61b, and the rear (rear surface) and the lower side (lower surface) are open. It is in shape. The front wall 61c is formed so as to be continuously flush with the front wall 51h of the connector accommodating portion 51g on the actuator support 51 side.
側壁61bは、コネクタ収容部51gの側壁51jに対して車両幅方向に凹んでいるペダルアクチュエータサポート51の側壁51dを覆う形状つまり該側壁51dに対応した形状をなしている。特に、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51側の凹溝部52と相補の形状をなす略長方形の突起片55が下方へ突出した形に形成されている。また、側壁61bの上部は、スライドレール31の上方を通って後方へと延びるように形成されており、この側壁61bの上部に、スライドレール31の第1ガイド面31aに上方から嵌合可能な半円形のレール嵌合部61dが切欠形成されている。図示例では、レール嵌合部61dは、アクチュエータサポート51の上部切欠部51eと同一の形状をなしている。
The side wall 61b has a shape that covers the side wall 51d of the pedal actuator support 51 that is recessed in the vehicle width direction with respect to the side wall 51j of the connector accommodating portion 51g, that is, a shape corresponding to the side wall 51d. In particular, a substantially rectangular protrusion 55 having a shape complementary to the concave groove 52 on the pedal actuator support 51 side is formed so as to project downward. Further, the upper portion of the side wall 61b is formed so as to pass above the slide rail 31 and extend rearward, and the upper portion of the side wall 61b can be fitted to the first guide surface 31a of the slide rail 31 from above. A semi-circular rail fitting portion 61d is notched. In the illustrated example, the rail fitting portion 61d has the same shape as the upper notch portion 51e of the actuator support 51.
ペダルアクチュエータサポート51の上部壁51bに重なるペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の上部壁61aの中央部には、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51側のグロメット54に対応したロックピン67が取り付けられている。ロックピン67は、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51のグロメット54のロック孔54aに対応した位置にあり、手指にて回転操作可能なように頭部に摘み部66を備えている。このロックピン67とグロメット54とから構成されるロック機構65は、前述したトランスミッションアクチュエータユニット131固定用のロック機構143(ロックピン144、グロメット121)やシフト用アクチュエータ134固定用のロック機構154(ロックピン155、グロメット162)と実質的に同一の構成である。
A lock pin 67 corresponding to the grommet 54 on the pedal actuator support 51 side is attached to the central portion of the upper wall 61a of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 that overlaps the upper wall 51b of the pedal actuator support 51. The lock pin 67 is located at a position corresponding to the lock hole 54a of the grommet 54 of the pedal actuator support 51, and has a knob portion 66 on the head so that the lock pin 67 can be rotated by a finger. The lock mechanism 65 composed of the lock pin 67 and the grommet 54 includes the lock mechanism 143 (lock pin 144, grommet 121) for fixing the transmission actuator unit 131 and the lock mechanism 154 (lock) for fixing the shift actuator 134. It has substantially the same configuration as the pin 155 and the glomet 162).
また、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の上部かつ前部のコーナ部には、後述するようにペダルアクチュエータ41が連結される金属製の支持ピン72が埋設されている。この支持ピン72は、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51と干渉しない位置にあり、かつ車両幅方向に沿って配置されている。そして、円筒面を有する一端の頭部72aがペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の車両幅方向一方のコーナ部において露出している。
Further, a metal support pin 72 to which the pedal actuator 41 is connected is embedded in the upper and front corners of the pedal actuator support bracket 61, as will be described later. The support pin 72 is located at a position where it does not interfere with the pedal actuator support 51, and is arranged along the vehicle width direction. The head 72a at one end having a cylindrical surface is exposed at one corner of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 in the vehicle width direction.
また、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の内側の空間には、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51のサポート側コネクタ53に対応したブラケット側コネクタ63が収容されている。このブラケット側コネクタ63は、前述した各コネクタと同様のものであり、相手側との間で多少の位置ズレを許容し得るように端子片が浮動状態に構成されているとともに、挿入時の案内を行うためのガイドピン63aおよびガイドスリーブ63bを備えた形式となっている。ブラケット側コネクタ63は、サポート側コネクタ53と対向するように下方へ向かって配置されている。
Further, in the space inside the pedal actuator support bracket 61, the bracket side connector 63 corresponding to the support side connector 53 of the pedal actuator support 51 is housed. The bracket side connector 63 is the same as each of the above-mentioned connectors, and the terminal piece is configured to be in a floating state so as to allow a slight positional deviation from the mating side, and a guide at the time of insertion is provided. The form is provided with a guide pin 63a and a guide sleeve 63b for performing the above. The bracket-side connector 63 is arranged downward so as to face the support-side connector 53.
図34は、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61をペダルアクチュエータサポート51に組み合わせた状態を示している。このように組み合わせた状態では、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61とペダルアクチュエータサポート51とで略直方体の箱状の外観を呈する。すなわち、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の前部壁61cの下縁とコネクタ収容部51gの前部壁51hの上縁とが合致し、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の側壁61bがペダルアクチュエータサポート51の側壁51dに重なり、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の上部壁61aがペダルアクチュエータサポート51の上部壁51bに重なる。ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の側壁61bの外縁は、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61のコネクタ収容部51gの側壁51j上縁と、凹溝部52周囲と、ガイド部52aとなる突条部51jaの側縁と、に合致し、上部のレール嵌合部61dがスライドレール31の第1ガイド面31aに嵌合した状態となる。
FIG. 34 shows a state in which the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is combined with the pedal actuator support 51. In such a combined state, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal actuator support 51 exhibit a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-like appearance. That is, the lower edge of the front wall 61c of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the upper edge of the front wall 51h of the connector accommodating portion 51g match, and the side wall 61b of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 becomes the side wall 51d of the pedal actuator support 51. Overlapping, the upper wall 61a of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 overlaps the upper wall 51b of the pedal actuator support 51. The outer edge of the side wall 61b of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is formed on the upper edge of the side wall 51j of the connector accommodating portion 51g of the pedal actuator support bracket 61, the periphery of the concave groove portion 52, and the side edge of the ridge portion 51ja serving as the guide portion 52a. It matches, and the upper rail fitting portion 61d is in a state of being fitted to the first guide surface 31a of the slide rail 31.
また、ロックピン67とグロメット54とからなる上部のロック機構65を締結することで、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61とペダルアクチュエータサポート51とが相対的に上下方向に締め付けられ、相補の形状をなす両者がより堅固に密接した状態となる。従って、ロック機構65の締結によって、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61ひいてはペダルアクチュエータ41がペダルアクチュエータサポート51に堅固に支持される。
Further, by fastening the upper lock mechanism 65 composed of the lock pin 67 and the grommet 54, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal actuator support 51 are relatively tightened in the vertical direction, and both having a complementary shape are formed. It will be in a tighter and closer state. Therefore, by fastening the lock mechanism 65, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and thus the pedal actuator 41 are firmly supported by the pedal actuator support 51.
ここで、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61のレール嵌合部61dは、ロック機構65を締結してペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61が相対的に下方へ引っ張られたときに、スライドレール31の第1ガイド面31aに強く圧接するように、その位置および寸法が設定されている。これにより、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61およびペダルアクチュエータサポート51は、スライドレール31に沿ったスライドが不能となり、車両幅方向に固定される。換言すれば、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51の上部切欠部51eと下部切欠部51fは、スライドレール31に対するペダルアクチュエータサポート51のスライドを許容するように寸法が設定されている。これに対し、ロック機構65を締め付けてペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61とペダルアクチュエータサポート51とを一体化した状態では、レール嵌合部61dと下部切欠部51fとの間でスライドレール31の第1,第2ガイド面31a,31bを上下に締め付けるように、各部の寸法が設定されている。従って、ペダルアクチュエータ41をペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61とともにペダルアクチュエータサポート51に組み付けた後、車両幅方向に沿って適宜な位置に調整した上でロック機構65を締結すれば、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61とペダルアクチュエータサポート51とが互いに固定されると同時に、ペダルアクチュエータ41の全体がスライドレール31に対して固定される。
Here, the rail fitting portion 61d of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is attached to the first guide surface 31a of the slide rail 31 when the lock mechanism 65 is fastened and the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is pulled relatively downward. Its position and dimensions are set so that it is strongly pressed. As a result, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal actuator support 51 cannot slide along the slide rail 31, and are fixed in the vehicle width direction. In other words, the upper notch 51e and the lower notch 51f of the pedal actuator support 51 are sized so as to allow the pedal actuator support 51 to slide with respect to the slide rail 31. On the other hand, when the lock mechanism 65 is tightened and the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal actuator support 51 are integrated, the first and first slide rails 31 are located between the rail fitting portion 61d and the lower notch portion 51f. 2 The dimensions of each part are set so as to tighten the guide surfaces 31a and 31b up and down. Therefore, if the pedal actuator 41 is assembled to the pedal actuator support 51 together with the pedal actuator support bracket 61, adjusted to an appropriate position along the vehicle width direction, and then the lock mechanism 65 is fastened, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal can be engaged. At the same time that the actuator support 51 is fixed to each other, the entire pedal actuator 41 is fixed to the slide rail 31.
すなわち、一つのロック機構65が、車両幅方向へスライド可能なペダルアクチュエータ41の位置を固定するためのロック機構と、着脱可能なように2分割して構成されるペダルアクチュエータサポート51とペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61とを一体化するためのロック機構と、の2つの機能を奏している。
That is, one lock mechanism 65 includes a lock mechanism for fixing the position of the pedal actuator 41 slidable in the vehicle width direction, and a pedal actuator support 51 and a pedal actuator support that are divided into two so as to be detachable. It has two functions, a lock mechanism for integrating the bracket 61 and the bracket 61.
また、車両自動運転装置1を運転席2上に搭載する際には、ペダルアクチュエータ41は予めペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61に組み付けられており、このペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61を含むペダルアクチュエータ41が車室内でフレーム11に取り付けることとなるが、上記の構成では、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61がペダルアクチュエータサポート51に仮保持されるため、狭い車室内での組立が容易である。
Further, when the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is mounted on the driver's seat 2, the pedal actuator 41 is previously assembled to the pedal actuator support bracket 61, and the pedal actuator 41 including the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is installed in the vehicle interior. Although it is attached to the frame 11, in the above configuration, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is temporarily held by the pedal actuator support 51, so that it can be easily assembled in a narrow vehicle interior.
ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61とペダルアクチュエータサポート51とは上下方向に組み合わされる構成となっており、作業者は、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の一対の突起片55をペダルアクチュエータサポート51側のガイド部52aに沿って凹溝部52内に嵌め込むようにして、上方からペダルアクチュエータサポート51に組み合わせることとなる。基本的に、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61はペダルアクチュエータサポート51の上に載った形となる。このとき、突起片55が凹溝部52に上方から入り込むと同時に、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61上部のレール嵌合部61dがスライドレール31の第1ガイド面31aに係合する。またほぼ同時に、ロック機構65のロックピン67がグロメット54のロック孔54aに入り、仮に係合した状態となる。
The pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal actuator support 51 are combined in the vertical direction, and the operator attaches the pair of protrusions 55 of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 along the guide portion 52a on the pedal actuator support 51 side. It is fitted into the concave groove portion 52 and combined with the pedal actuator support 51 from above. Basically, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is mounted on the pedal actuator support 51. At this time, the protrusion piece 55 enters the concave groove portion 52 from above, and at the same time, the rail fitting portion 61d on the upper portion of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 engages with the first guide surface 31a of the slide rail 31. At about the same time, the lock pin 67 of the lock mechanism 65 enters the lock hole 54a of the grommet 54 and is temporarily engaged.
重量物であるペダルアクチュエータ41の荷重は、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の上部の支持ピン72に作用するので、下部の突起片55が凹溝部52に係合した状態では、この突起片55と凹溝部52との係合部(第1の係合部)を支点として前方へ向かうモーメントが発生する。このモーメントに対し、上部でのレール嵌合部61dとガイド面31aとの係合部あるいはロックピン67とロック孔54aとの係合部が第2の係合部としてモーメントを支承する。従って、作業者がペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61をペダルアクチュエータサポート51の上に載せた後、ペダルアクチュエータ41を支持する手を離したとしても、ペダルアクチュエータ41が落下することはなく、スライドレール31に仮に保持された状態となる。そのため、作業者は、狭い車室内で、ペダルアクチュエータ41の位置調整を行いつつスライドレール31つまりフレーム11にペダルアクチュエータ41を容易に取り付けることができる。
Since the load of the pedal actuator 41, which is a heavy object, acts on the support pin 72 at the upper part of the pedal actuator support bracket 61, when the lower protrusion piece 55 is engaged with the concave groove portion 52, the protrusion piece 55 and the concave groove portion A forward moment is generated with the engaging portion (first engaging portion) with 52 as a fulcrum. With respect to this moment, the engaging portion between the rail fitting portion 61d and the guide surface 31a at the upper part or the engaging portion between the lock pin 67 and the lock hole 54a bears the moment as the second engaging portion. Therefore, even if the operator puts the pedal actuator support bracket 61 on the pedal actuator support 51 and then releases the hand supporting the pedal actuator 41, the pedal actuator 41 does not fall and is temporarily attached to the slide rail 31. It will be in a held state. Therefore, the operator can easily attach the pedal actuator 41 to the slide rail 31, that is, the frame 11 while adjusting the position of the pedal actuator 41 in a narrow vehicle interior.
ペダルアクチュエータサポート51におけるサポート側コネクタ53とペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61におけるブラケット側コネクタ63とは、上記のようにペダルアクチュエータサポート51とペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61とを上下方向に沿って組み立てることで、互いに接続される。両コネクタ53,63は、各々のガイドピン53a,63aとガイドスリーブ53b,63bとの嵌合によって位置合わせがなされるが、好ましくは、両コネクタ53,63が互いに接触する前つまりガイドピン53a,63aとガイドスリーブ53b,63bとが接触する前に、突起片55の先端が凹溝部52に挿入されるように突起片55の突出長が設定されている(図35参照)。これにより、ある程度の位置合わせがなされた状態でガイドピン53a,63aとガイドスリーブ53b,63bとが係合することとなり、コネクタ53,63の損傷が確実に回避される。
The support side connector 53 in the pedal actuator support 51 and the bracket side connector 63 in the pedal actuator support bracket 61 are connected to each other by assembling the pedal actuator support 51 and the pedal actuator support bracket 61 in the vertical direction as described above. Will be done. Both connectors 53 and 63 are aligned by fitting the guide pins 53a and 63a with the guide sleeves 53b and 63b, but preferably before the both connectors 53 and 63 come into contact with each other, that is, the guide pins 53a, The protruding length of the protruding piece 55 is set so that the tip of the protruding piece 55 is inserted into the concave groove portion 52 before the 63a and the guide sleeves 53b and 63b come into contact with each other (see FIG. 35). As a result, the guide pins 53a and 63a and the guide sleeves 53b and 63b are engaged with each other in a state where the alignment is performed to some extent, and damage to the connectors 53 and 63 is surely avoided.
[ペダルアクチュエータ41の構成およびその姿勢調整機構]
図28~図31を参照して説明する。ペダルアクチュエータ41は、やはりピニオン・ラック形式の直線運動型アクチュエータであり、アクチュエータロッドとなるラック軸80をスライド可能に支持しかつ収容した細長いアクチュエータハウジング78と、このアクチュエータハウジング78の先端部側面に取り付けられたモータハウジング81を、備え、モータハウジング81内に減速機および電動モータが収容されている。なお、必要な電動モータの容量が各ペダルアクチュエータ41で異なることから、モータハウジング81の大きさも異なるものとなっている。図示例では、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aは、ラック軸80と平行にコイルスプリングからなるリターンスプリング82を備えている。これにより、例えば電源喪失時に、アクセルペダルの不要な踏込が生じることはない。ブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bは、リターンスプリング82を具備しておらず、この相違点を除けば、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aとブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bは実質的に同じ構成である。クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cは、後述するようにいくつかの点でアクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aやブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bと異なっている。 [Structure ofPedal Actuator 41 and Its Attitude Adjustment Mechanism]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31. Thepedal actuator 41 is also a pinion rack type linear motion actuator, and is attached to an elongated actuator housing 78 that slidably supports and accommodates a rack shaft 80 serving as an actuator rod, and a side surface of the tip of the actuator housing 78. The motor housing 81 is provided, and the speed reducer and the electric motor are housed in the motor housing 81. Since the required capacity of the electric motor is different for each pedal actuator 41, the size of the motor housing 81 is also different. In the illustrated example, the accelerator pedal actuator 41A includes a return spring 82 formed of a coil spring in parallel with the rack shaft 80. As a result, for example, when the power is lost, unnecessary depression of the accelerator pedal does not occur. The brake pedal actuator 41B does not include the return spring 82, and the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B have substantially the same configuration except for this difference. The clutch pedal actuator 41C is different from the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B in some respects as will be described later.
図28~図31を参照して説明する。ペダルアクチュエータ41は、やはりピニオン・ラック形式の直線運動型アクチュエータであり、アクチュエータロッドとなるラック軸80をスライド可能に支持しかつ収容した細長いアクチュエータハウジング78と、このアクチュエータハウジング78の先端部側面に取り付けられたモータハウジング81を、備え、モータハウジング81内に減速機および電動モータが収容されている。なお、必要な電動モータの容量が各ペダルアクチュエータ41で異なることから、モータハウジング81の大きさも異なるものとなっている。図示例では、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aは、ラック軸80と平行にコイルスプリングからなるリターンスプリング82を備えている。これにより、例えば電源喪失時に、アクセルペダルの不要な踏込が生じることはない。ブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bは、リターンスプリング82を具備しておらず、この相違点を除けば、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aとブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bは実質的に同じ構成である。クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cは、後述するようにいくつかの点でアクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aやブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bと異なっている。 [Structure of
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31. The
シートクッション3の高さに比べてペダル45,46,47は相対的に下方に位置しているので、アクチュエータハウジング78(換言すればラック軸80)は、ペダル45,46,47へ向かう先端側がフレーム11寄りの基端側よりも低い位置となるように傾斜している。ラック軸80は、断面円形の棒状をなしており、アクチュエータハウジング78から突出する先端部がペダル45,46,47を押圧する。
Since the pedals 45, 46, 47 are located relatively lower than the height of the seat cushion 3, the actuator housing 78 (in other words, the rack shaft 80) has the tip side toward the pedals 45, 46, 47. It is inclined so as to be lower than the base end side near the frame 11. The rack shaft 80 has a rod shape with a circular cross section, and the tip portion protruding from the actuator housing 78 presses the pedals 45, 46, 47.
アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aないしブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bにあっては、ラック軸80の先端に円柱形の押圧部材86が取り付けられており、この押圧部材86がペダル45,46を押圧している。
In the accelerator pedal actuator 41A to the brake pedal actuator 41B, a cylindrical pressing member 86 is attached to the tip of the rack shaft 80, and the pressing member 86 presses the pedals 45 and 46.
図30、図31および図33に示すように、アクチュエータハウジング78は、上述したペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61と、リンクアーム68と、スライドブラケット69と、支持アーム70と、を介してペダルアクチュエータサポート51に支持されている。
As shown in FIGS. 30, 31 and 33, the actuator housing 78 is attached to the pedal actuator support 51 via the pedal actuator support bracket 61, the link arm 68, the slide bracket 69, and the support arm 70 described above. It is supported.
スライドブラケット69は、アクチュエータハウジング78を該アクチュエータハウジング78の下面側において前後にスライド可能に支持するものである。スライドブラケット69は、スライドさせて位置調整したアクチュエータハウジング78をスライドブラケット69に対して固定するための固定ネジ79を備えている。すなわち、アクチュエータハウジング78下面にペダルアクチュエータ41の軸方向(前後方向)に沿ったガイドスリット71が開口形成されており、固定ネジ79の軸部が該ガイドスリット71を貫通しているとともに、アクチュエータハウジング78内側に位置するパッド69Aに螺合している。従って、固定ネジ79を緩めた状態では、パッド69Aが緩み、スライドブラケット69とアクチュエータハウジング78とが相対的にスライド可能となる。そして、固定ネジ79の締付によりアクチュエータハウジング78がスライドブラケット69に固定される。固定ネジ79は、頭部にL字形のレバー部分を備えており、手指にて締付操作が可能である。従って、車両におけるペダル45,46,47の位置に応じてアクチュエータハウジング78の前後位置を簡単に調整することができる。
The slide bracket 69 supports the actuator housing 78 so as to be slidable back and forth on the lower surface side of the actuator housing 78. The slide bracket 69 includes a fixing screw 79 for fixing the actuator housing 78, which has been slid and adjusted in position, to the slide bracket 69. That is, a guide slit 71 is formed on the lower surface of the actuator housing 78 along the axial direction (front-back direction) of the pedal actuator 41, and the shaft portion of the fixing screw 79 penetrates the guide slit 71 and the actuator housing. It is screwed into the pad 69A located inside the 78. Therefore, when the fixing screw 79 is loosened, the pad 69A is loosened, and the slide bracket 69 and the actuator housing 78 can be relatively slidable. Then, the actuator housing 78 is fixed to the slide bracket 69 by tightening the fixing screw 79. The fixing screw 79 is provided with an L-shaped lever portion on the head, and can be tightened with fingers. Therefore, the front-rear position of the actuator housing 78 can be easily adjusted according to the positions of the pedals 45, 46, 47 in the vehicle.
図36の断面図(図29のD-D線に沿った断面図)に示すように、スライドブラケット69の後端部には、円筒状の軸受部74が形成されており、該軸受部74を介して支持アーム70が揺動可能に連結されている。すなわち、支持アーム70は、軸受部74に回転可能に嵌合する第1円筒部70aと、該第1円筒部70aからスライドブラケット69の下方へと延びたレバー部70bと、レバー部70bを挟んで第1円筒部70aとは反対側となる軸方向に延びた第2円筒部70cと、を有する。図示例では、第1円筒部70aと第2円筒部70cは、互いの中心軸が一致するように構成され、かつ互いに等しい径を有する。
As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 36 (cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 29), a cylindrical bearing portion 74 is formed at the rear end portion of the slide bracket 69, and the bearing portion 74 is formed. The support arms 70 are oscillatingly connected to each other. That is, the support arm 70 sandwiches the first cylindrical portion 70a rotatably fitted to the bearing portion 74, the lever portion 70b extending downward from the first cylindrical portion 70a to the slide bracket 69, and the lever portion 70b. It has a second cylindrical portion 70c extending in the axial direction, which is opposite to the first cylindrical portion 70a. In the illustrated example, the first cylindrical portion 70a and the second cylindrical portion 70c are configured so that their central axes coincide with each other and have the same diameter.
リンクアーム68は、両端部に円筒状の軸連結部を有する部材であって、円筒状をなす一端部68aがペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61における支持ピン72の頭部72aの外周に揺動可能に連結され、円筒状をなす他端部68bが支持アーム70の第2円筒部70cの外周に揺動可能に連結されている。詳しくは、図36に示すように、リンクアーム68が支持アーム70のレバー部70bの軸方向外側に隣接し、リンクアーム68の他端部68bが第2円筒部70cの外周に嵌合している。
The link arm 68 is a member having cylindrical shaft connecting portions at both ends, and one end portion 68a forming a cylindrical shape is swingably connected to the outer circumference of the head portion 72a of the support pin 72 in the pedal actuator support bracket 61. The other end portion 68b forming a cylindrical shape is swingably connected to the outer circumference of the second cylindrical portion 70c of the support arm 70. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, the link arm 68 is adjacent to the axially outer side of the lever portion 70b of the support arm 70, and the other end portion 68b of the link arm 68 is fitted to the outer periphery of the second cylindrical portion 70c. There is.
リンクアーム68は、中央のロッド部68cが2つ割り状(半割状)に形成されており、円筒状をなす各端部68a,68bが同様に半径線に沿って厳密には略C字状となるように切り離されている。ロッド部68cの中央には、このように略C字状となる各端部を直径方向に締め付けるように固定ネジ73が設けられている。固定ネジ73は、スライドブラケット69の固定ネジ79と同様に、手指にて締付操作するためのL字形のレバー部分を備えている。
In the link arm 68, the central rod portion 68c is formed in a halved shape (half-split shape), and the cylindrical end portions 68a and 68b are similarly substantially C-shaped along the radius line. It is separated so that it becomes a shape. At the center of the rod portion 68c, a fixing screw 73 is provided so as to tighten each end portion having a substantially C shape in the radial direction. Like the fixing screw 79 of the slide bracket 69, the fixing screw 73 includes an L-shaped lever portion for tightening operation with fingers.
固定ネジ73を緩めた状態では、リンクアーム68の一対の端部68a,68bの各々が内側の軸部材(支持ピン72の頭部72a、および、支持アーム70の一部である第2円筒部70c)に対して揺動自在となる。そのため、支持ピン72を中心としたスライドブラケット69の揺動高さ位置を自在に変更できるとともに、支持アーム70がリンクアーム68に対して自在に揺動する。
When the fixing screw 73 is loosened, each of the pair of end portions 68a and 68b of the link arm 68 is an inner shaft member (the head 72a of the support pin 72 and the second cylindrical portion which is a part of the support arm 70). It is swingable with respect to 70c). Therefore, the swing height position of the slide bracket 69 centered on the support pin 72 can be freely changed, and the support arm 70 swings freely with respect to the link arm 68.
これに対し、固定ネジ73を締め付けた状態では、リンクアーム68の一対の端部68a,68bの各々が内側の軸部材(支持ピン72の頭部72a、および、支持アーム70の一部である第2円筒部70c)に対して固定される。そのため、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61に対するリンクアーム68の角度が固定され、かつ、このリンクアーム68に対する支持アーム70の角度が固定される。このとき、支持アーム70の軸受部74の内周にある第1円筒部70aは締付力を受けず、従って、スライドブラケット69は支持アーム70やリンクアーム68に対して揺動可能に連結されている。
On the other hand, when the fixing screw 73 is tightened, each of the pair of end portions 68a and 68b of the link arm 68 is an inner shaft member (head 72a of the support pin 72 and a part of the support arm 70). It is fixed to the second cylindrical portion 70c). Therefore, the angle of the link arm 68 with respect to the pedal actuator support bracket 61 is fixed, and the angle of the support arm 70 with respect to the link arm 68 is fixed. At this time, the first cylindrical portion 70a on the inner circumference of the bearing portion 74 of the support arm 70 is not subjected to the tightening force, and therefore the slide bracket 69 is swingably connected to the support arm 70 and the link arm 68. ing.
支持アーム70やリンクアーム68に対するスライドブラケット69の角度(ひいてはペダルアクチュエータ41の傾斜姿勢)は、最終的に、支持アーム70のレバー部70b先端とスライドブラケット69前端部との間に配設されたネジ機構を用いた可変長ロッド83によって調整され、かつ固定される(図34参照)。
The angle of the slide bracket 69 with respect to the support arm 70 and the link arm 68 (and thus the tilted posture of the pedal actuator 41) is finally arranged between the tip of the lever portion 70b of the support arm 70 and the front end portion of the slide bracket 69. It is adjusted and fixed by a variable length rod 83 using a screw mechanism (see FIG. 34).
可変長ロッド83は、図37の断面図にも示すように、互いに逆向きの螺条を有する一対のネジロッド84A,84Bと、これら2つのネジロッド84A,84Bの先端部が中心のネジ孔に螺合した調整ナット85と、この調整ナット85の端面にそれぞれ隣接した一対のロックナット85A,85Bと、を備えている。ネジロッド84Aの基端は、レバー部70b先端の連結部70dに揺動可能に連結されており、ネジロッド84Bの基端は、スライドブラケット69前端部の連結部69aに揺動可能に連結されている。調整ナット85およびロックナット85A,85Bは、いずれも、手指での回転操作が可能なように周囲に凹凸を形成した円盤状に形成されている。可変長ロッド83は、いわゆるターンバックルに類した機構であり、一対の逆向きのネジを組み合わせることで、調整ナット85の回転操作に伴って全長(つまり2つの連結部70d,69aの間の距離)が変化する。調整ナット85による角度調整後、ロックナット85A,85Bを調整ナット85に接するように締め付ければ、調整ナット85の不用意な回転つまり緩みが制限される。
As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 37, the variable length rod 83 has a pair of screw rods 84A and 84B having threads opposite to each other, and the tips of these two screw rods 84A and 84B are screwed into the central screw hole. A combined adjusting nut 85 and a pair of locknuts 85A and 85B adjacent to the end faces of the adjusting nut 85 are provided. The base end of the screw rod 84A is swingably connected to the connecting portion 70d at the tip of the lever portion 70b, and the base end of the screw rod 84B is swingably connected to the connecting portion 69a of the front end portion of the slide bracket 69. .. The adjusting nut 85 and the locknuts 85A and 85B are both formed in a disk shape having irregularities around them so that they can be rotated by fingers. The variable length rod 83 is a mechanism similar to a so-called turnbuckle, and by combining a pair of screws in opposite directions, the total length (that is, the distance between the two connecting portions 70d and 69a) is accompanied by the rotation operation of the adjusting nut 85. ) Changes. After adjusting the angle with the adjusting nut 85, if the locknuts 85A and 85B are tightened so as to be in contact with the adjusting nut 85, careless rotation, that is, loosening of the adjusting nut 85 is restricted.
容易に理解できるように、可変長ロッド83は三角形の一辺に相当するので、可変長ロッド83の全長を長くすれば、ペダルアクチュエータ41の傾斜角は緩くなり(つまりラック軸80の先端位置が高くなる)、可変長ロッド83の全長を短くすれば、ペダルアクチュエータ41の傾斜角は急になる(つまりラック軸80の先端位置が低くなる)。可変長ロッド83の長さはネジ機構により連続的に変化し得るので、ペダルアクチュエータ41の傾斜角も連続的に可変調整可能である。
As can be easily understood, since the variable length rod 83 corresponds to one side of the triangle, if the total length of the variable length rod 83 is increased, the inclination angle of the pedal actuator 41 becomes loose (that is, the tip position of the rack shaft 80 becomes high). If the total length of the variable length rod 83 is shortened, the inclination angle of the pedal actuator 41 becomes steeper (that is, the tip position of the rack shaft 80 becomes lower). Since the length of the variable length rod 83 can be continuously changed by the screw mechanism, the inclination angle of the pedal actuator 41 can also be continuously variably adjusted.
なお、可変長ロッド83の伸縮変化に伴い、スライドブラケット69と支持アーム70との相対的な角度が変化する。支持アーム70の円筒状の基部には、該支持アーム70側に設けられたストッパ片75aと、このストッパ片75aを挟むようにしてスライドブラケット69側に設けられた一対のストッパ片75b,75cと、からなるストッパ機構75が設けられており、このストッパ機構75が、支持アーム70に対するスライドブラケット69の角度変化を所定範囲に制限している。
The relative angle between the slide bracket 69 and the support arm 70 changes as the variable length rod 83 expands and contracts. The cylindrical base of the support arm 70 is composed of a stopper piece 75a provided on the support arm 70 side and a pair of stopper pieces 75b and 75c provided on the slide bracket 69 side so as to sandwich the stopper piece 75a. A stopper mechanism 75 is provided, and the stopper mechanism 75 limits the change in the angle of the slide bracket 69 with respect to the support arm 70 within a predetermined range.
このように、ペダルアクチュエータ41は、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61を介して車両自動運転装置1のフレーム11詳しくはペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31に着脱可能に取り付けられる。スライドレール31により車両幅方向に沿ったペダルアクチュエータ41の位置調整がなされる。そして、リンクアーム68の傾斜角度の調整によりペダルアクチュエータ41の後端部側の高さ位置を変更できるとともに、可変長ロッド83により車両幅方向と直交する面に沿ってペダルアクチュエータ41の傾斜姿勢を調整でき、かつ、スライドブラケット69を介した前後方向の調整が可能である。従って、これらの組み合わせにより、車種によって異なるペダル位置やペダルの傾きに対応することが可能となる。
As described above, the pedal actuator 41 is detachably attached to the frame 11 of the vehicle automatic driving device 1 via the pedal actuator support bracket 61, specifically, the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator. The slide rail 31 adjusts the position of the pedal actuator 41 along the vehicle width direction. Then, the height position on the rear end side of the pedal actuator 41 can be changed by adjusting the tilt angle of the link arm 68, and the tilt posture of the pedal actuator 41 can be changed along the plane orthogonal to the vehicle width direction by the variable length rod 83. It can be adjusted and can be adjusted in the front-rear direction via the slide bracket 69. Therefore, by combining these, it is possible to deal with different pedal positions and pedal inclinations depending on the vehicle type.
なお、ペダルアクチュエータ41の電動モータに至るケーブルは、アクチュエータハウジング78の内部を通して配置されており、その端部は、アクチュエータハウジング78のリンクアーム68側の端部から外部へ引き出された上で、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61内部を通してブラケット側コネクタ63に接続されている。
The cable leading to the electric motor of the pedal actuator 41 is arranged through the inside of the actuator housing 78, and the end portion thereof is pulled out from the end portion of the actuator housing 78 on the link arm 68 side and then the pedal. It is connected to the bracket side connector 63 through the inside of the actuator support bracket 61.
従って、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61をペダルアクチュエータサポート51に対して取り付けることで、同時に、コネクタ53,63を介した電気的接続がなされる。そのため、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51とペダルアクチュエータ41との間に外部のケーブルやコネクタ類は存在しない。
Therefore, by attaching the pedal actuator support bracket 61 to the pedal actuator support 51, at the same time, electrical connection is made via the connectors 53 and 63. Therefore, there are no external cables or connectors between the pedal actuator support 51 and the pedal actuator 41.
このようにペダルアクチュエータ41の着脱が容易であるので、車両自動運転装置1を車両に搭載するに際しては、フレーム11(スライドレール31)からペダルアクチュエータ41を取り外した状態としておき、フレーム11を運転席2上に固定・支持した後に車内でペダルアクチュエータ41を取り付けることができる。逆に車両自動運転装置1を車両から取り外す際にも、先にペダルアクチュエータ41を取り外してからフレーム11を車外へ出すことができる。これにより、ドア開口部を通した車内への車両自動運転装置1の搬入ならびに車外への搬出が容易となる。また、各ペダル45,46,47に対するペダルアクチュエータ41の位置調整は、フレーム11にペダルアクチュエータ41を取り付けた後に車内で容易に行うことができる。
Since the pedal actuator 41 can be easily attached and detached in this way, when the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is mounted on the vehicle, the pedal actuator 41 is left removed from the frame 11 (slide rail 31), and the frame 11 is placed in the driver's seat. 2 The pedal actuator 41 can be mounted in the vehicle after being fixed and supported on the vehicle. On the contrary, when the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is removed from the vehicle, the pedal actuator 41 can be removed first, and then the frame 11 can be taken out of the vehicle. As a result, the vehicle automatic driving device 1 can be easily carried in and out of the vehicle through the door opening. Further, the position adjustment of the pedal actuator 41 with respect to the pedals 45, 46, 47 can be easily performed in the vehicle after the pedal actuator 41 is attached to the frame 11.
さらに、図9に示すように、各々のペダルアクチュエータサポート51の下面つまり下部壁51cの下面には、比較的小型のLEDライト76をそれぞれ備えている。各々のLEDライト76は、斜め下方を指向するように配置されており、換言すれば、各ペダルアクチュエータサポート51が支持するペダルアクチュエータ41の先端部付近を照らすように構成されている。
Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a relatively small LED light 76 is provided on the lower surface of each pedal actuator support 51, that is, the lower surface of the lower wall 51c. Each LED light 76 is arranged so as to point diagonally downward, in other words, is configured to illuminate the vicinity of the tip of the pedal actuator 41 supported by each pedal actuator support 51.
このLEDライト76は、基本的に、車両自動運転装置1を車室内に搬入してペダルアクチュエータ41の取付ないし位置調整作業を行う際に使用するための照明であり、接続ボックス106に内蔵されている二次電池より具体的にはキャパシタを電源として動作する。二次電池となるキャパシタは、接続ボックス106にメインコネクタ107を介して外部電源が接続されているときに、接続ボックス106内部の充電回路を介して自動的に充電される。換言すれば、車両自動運転装置1を用いた試験運転中に、特に操作を要することなく、繰り返し充電される。
The LED light 76 is basically a light for being used when the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is carried into the vehicle interior to install or adjust the position of the pedal actuator 41, and is built in the connection box 106. More specifically, it operates using a capacitor as a power source. When an external power source is connected to the connection box 106 via the main connector 107, the capacitor serving as the secondary battery is automatically charged via the charging circuit inside the connection box 106. In other words, during the test operation using the vehicle automatic driving device 1, the vehicle is repeatedly charged without requiring any particular operation.
車両自動運転装置1を車室内に設置する作業時には、一般にメインコネクタ107に外部電源からのケーブルは接続されていない。このような状況下で、二次電池を利用してLEDライト76を点灯することで、最も暗い運転席前方のペダル付近を照らすことができ、操作性が向上する。
When installing the vehicle automatic driving device 1 in the vehicle interior, the cable from the external power supply is generally not connected to the main connector 107. Under such circumstances, by turning on the LED light 76 using the secondary battery, it is possible to illuminate the vicinity of the pedal in front of the driver's seat, which is the darkest, and the operability is improved.
前述したように接続ボックス106上面の表示パネル109にライトスイッチ109cが配置されており、このライトスイッチ109cによってLEDライト76がオン・オフ操作される。LEDライト76がペダルアクチュエータサポート51のサポート側コネクタ53の近傍に位置することで、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51における配線の取り回しは容易となる。
As described above, the light switch 109c is arranged on the display panel 109 on the upper surface of the connection box 106, and the LED light 76 is turned on / off by the light switch 109c. Since the LED light 76 is located near the support side connector 53 of the pedal actuator support 51, the wiring in the pedal actuator support 51 can be easily routed.
[ペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31の変形例]
上記のようにペダルアクチュエータ41の後端部(基部)の高さ位置は、リンクアーム68の角度調整により変更することができるが、フレーム11に対するペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31の高さ位置を可変調整すれば、より柔軟に多様な車種に対応することができる。 [Modification example ofslide rail 31 for supporting pedal actuator]
As described above, the height position of the rear end portion (base portion) of thepedal actuator 41 can be changed by adjusting the angle of the link arm 68, but the height position of the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator with respect to the frame 11 can be changed. If adjusted, it will be possible to respond more flexibly to various vehicle types.
上記のようにペダルアクチュエータ41の後端部(基部)の高さ位置は、リンクアーム68の角度調整により変更することができるが、フレーム11に対するペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31の高さ位置を可変調整すれば、より柔軟に多様な車種に対応することができる。 [Modification example of
As described above, the height position of the rear end portion (base portion) of the
図45~図47は、ペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31を高さ調整可能とした変形例を示している。この構成では、上下方向の寸法がスライドレール31の上下方向の寸法よりも大きな略長方形状をなす金属製のレール支持ブラケットプレート32Aが、前述したレール支持ブラケット32に代えて、ペダルアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31の本体部分とは別体に設けられている。レール支持ブラケットプレート32Aは、メインフレーム15の前端詳しくはメインビーム15aの前端面に取り付けられており、メインフレーム15の前端の開放端を閉じている(図46、図47参照)。
FIGS. 45 to 47 show a modified example in which the height of the slide rail 31 for supporting the pedal actuator can be adjusted. In this configuration, the metal rail support bracket plate 32A having a substantially rectangular shape whose vertical dimension is larger than the vertical dimension of the slide rail 31 replaces the rail support bracket 32 described above with a slide for supporting the pedal actuator. It is provided separately from the main body portion of the rail 31. The rail support bracket plate 32A is attached to the front end surface of the main frame 15 in detail on the front end surface of the main beam 15a, and closes the open end of the front end of the main frame 15 (see FIGS. 46 and 47).
スライドレール31は、複数本のネジ77Aによってレール支持ブラケットプレート32Aに固定されている。レール支持ブラケットプレート32Aには、レール支持ブラケットプレート32Aの高さ位置(取付位置)を上下に変更可能なように、高さ位置が異なる複数箇所にネジ孔77Bが配置されている。従って、必要に応じてスライドレール31を脱着し、高さ位置を変更することが可能である。
The slide rail 31 is fixed to the rail support bracket plate 32A by a plurality of screws 77A. In the rail support bracket plate 32A, screw holes 77B are arranged at a plurality of locations having different height positions so that the height position (mounting position) of the rail support bracket plate 32A can be changed up and down. Therefore, the slide rail 31 can be attached and detached and the height position can be changed as needed.
図45~図47は、スライドレール31を最も低い位置に取り付けた状態を示している。
FIGS. 45 to 47 show a state in which the slide rail 31 is attached at the lowest position.
[クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cの構成]
手動変速機を備えた車両においては、一般に、クラッチペダル47は弧を描くように動作し、そのストローク(踏込操作量)も比較的大きい。本実施例では、このようなクラッチペダル47の特性を考慮して、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cが細部において他の2つのペダルアクチュエータ41A,41Bとは異なっている。以下、図31、図33および図34を参照しつつ相違点を説明する。 [Structure ofclutch pedal actuator 41C]
In a vehicle equipped with a manual transmission, theclutch pedal 47 generally operates in an arc, and its stroke (stepping operation amount) is also relatively large. In this embodiment, the clutch pedal actuator 41C is different from the other two pedal actuators 41A and 41B in detail in consideration of such characteristics of the clutch pedal 47. Hereinafter, the differences will be described with reference to FIGS. 31, 33 and 34.
手動変速機を備えた車両においては、一般に、クラッチペダル47は弧を描くように動作し、そのストローク(踏込操作量)も比較的大きい。本実施例では、このようなクラッチペダル47の特性を考慮して、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cが細部において他の2つのペダルアクチュエータ41A,41Bとは異なっている。以下、図31、図33および図34を参照しつつ相違点を説明する。 [Structure of
In a vehicle equipped with a manual transmission, the
相違点の1つは、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61とペダルアクチュエータ41との間のリンクアーム68や支持アーム70による連結部の構成である。クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cにおいても、アクチュエータハウジング78は、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61と、リンクアーム68と、スライドブラケット69と、支持アーム70と、を介してペダルアクチュエータサポート51に支持されている。ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61、リンクアーム68、スライドブラケット69、支持アーム70、といった主要な部品は、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aやブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bのものと変わりがない。
One of the differences is the configuration of the connecting portion by the link arm 68 and the support arm 70 between the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the pedal actuator 41. Also in the clutch pedal actuator 41C, the actuator housing 78 is supported by the pedal actuator support 51 via the pedal actuator support bracket 61, the link arm 68, the slide bracket 69, and the support arm 70. The main parts such as the pedal actuator support bracket 61, the link arm 68, the slide bracket 69, and the support arm 70 are the same as those of the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B.
しかしながら、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cにおいては、リンクアーム68の一端部68aの内周面とペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の支持ピン72の頭部72aとの間に、図示しないスリーブが介在している。そのため、リンクアーム68の固定ネジ73を締め付けても、リンクアーム68は支持ピン72に対して固定されず、支持ピン72に対して揺動可能な状態を維持する。つまり、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cにあっては、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61とリンクアーム68とが揺動自在に連結されている。リンクアーム68の他端部68bにおいては、固定ネジ73の締付により、前述したように支持アーム70が固定される。つまり、リンクアーム68とレバー部70bとの間の角度が一定に固定される。
However, in the clutch pedal actuator 41C, a sleeve (not shown) is interposed between the inner peripheral surface of one end portion 68a of the link arm 68 and the head portion 72a of the support pin 72 of the pedal actuator support bracket 61. Therefore, even if the fixing screw 73 of the link arm 68 is tightened, the link arm 68 is not fixed to the support pin 72 and maintains a swingable state with respect to the support pin 72. That is, in the clutch pedal actuator 41C, the pedal actuator support bracket 61 and the link arm 68 are swingably connected to each other. At the other end 68b of the link arm 68, the support arm 70 is fixed as described above by tightening the fixing screw 73. That is, the angle between the link arm 68 and the lever portion 70b is fixed to be constant.
また、図34等に示すように、レバー部70b先端の連結部70dとスライドブラケット69の連結部69aとの間には、前述した可変長ロッド83に代えて、固定長のロッド部材88が取り付けられている。これにより、支持アーム70とスライドブラケット69ひいてはアクチュエータハウジング78との角度関係が常に一定となる。
Further, as shown in FIG. 34 and the like, a fixed length rod member 88 is attached between the connecting portion 70d at the tip of the lever portion 70b and the connecting portion 69a of the slide bracket 69 instead of the variable length rod 83 described above. Has been done. As a result, the angular relationship between the support arm 70 and the slide bracket 69 and thus the actuator housing 78 is always constant.
従って、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cは、全体としてペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の支持ピン72を中心として揺動可能に支持されている。また、固定ネジ73を介した調整により、リンクアーム68の他端部68bの位置つまりリンクアーム68とアクチュエータハウジング78との接続点の位置(主に高さ位置)の変更が可能である。
Therefore, the clutch pedal actuator 41C is supported so as to be swingable around the support pin 72 of the pedal actuator support bracket 61 as a whole. Further, the position of the other end 68b of the link arm 68, that is, the position of the connection point between the link arm 68 and the actuator housing 78 (mainly the height position) can be changed by the adjustment via the fixing screw 73.
なお、上記実施例では、他の2つのペダルアクチュエータ41A,41Bとの間で、リンクアーム68等の主要な部品の共用化を図っている。
In the above embodiment, the main parts such as the link arm 68 are shared with the other two pedal actuators 41A and 41B.
第2の相違点は、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cでは、ラック軸80の先端に、前述した押圧部材86に代えて揺動プレート87を備えている点である。すなわち、図31や図5に示すように、ラック軸80の先端に揺動プレート87が揺動可能に取り付けられている。この揺動プレート87は、クラッチペダル47のペダル部に重ねて配置され、図示しない適当な治具ないし固定具によってペダル部に固定されている。揺動プレート87は、車両幅方向に沿った回転中心軸を有するようにピン87aによって揺動可能に支持されている。
The second difference is that the clutch pedal actuator 41C is provided with a swing plate 87 at the tip of the rack shaft 80 instead of the above-mentioned pressing member 86. That is, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 5, a swing plate 87 is swingably attached to the tip of the rack shaft 80. The swing plate 87 is arranged so as to be overlapped with the pedal portion of the clutch pedal 47, and is fixed to the pedal portion by an appropriate jig or fixture (not shown). The swing plate 87 is swingably supported by a pin 87a so as to have a rotation center axis along the vehicle width direction.
クラッチペダル47にあっては、一般に、ペダル面の傾きが、クラッチペダル47のストローク(踏込)に伴って比較的大きく変化する。具体的には、踏み込まれていない状態では、ペダル面が斜め上方を指向しており、クラッチペダル47が踏み込まれていくと、ペダル面は、ほぼ垂直となり、さらに極端な場合には逆に斜め下向きとなる。
In the clutch pedal 47, in general, the inclination of the pedal surface changes relatively greatly with the stroke (depression) of the clutch pedal 47. Specifically, when the pedal is not depressed, the pedal surface is directed diagonally upward, and when the clutch pedal 47 is depressed, the pedal surface becomes almost vertical, and in a more extreme case, the pedal surface is oblique. It turns downward.
仮にアクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aやブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bのように単純に押圧部材86がペダル面に接しているとすると、ペダル面の角度変化に伴って押圧部材86がペダル面から脱落する懸念があり、かつ正確なストロークが得られない。
If the pressing member 86 is simply in contact with the pedal surface as in the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B, there is a concern that the pressing member 86 may fall off from the pedal surface as the angle of the pedal surface changes. Accurate stroke cannot be obtained.
これに対し、上記実施例のクラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cにあっては、先端の揺動プレート87がペダル部に固定されるため、ペダル面の角度変化に拘わらずクラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cが確実にペダル部を押圧操作することができる。
On the other hand, in the clutch pedal actuator 41C of the above embodiment, since the swing plate 87 at the tip is fixed to the pedal portion, the clutch pedal actuator 41C reliably holds the pedal portion regardless of the change in the angle of the pedal surface. It can be pressed.
また、クラッチペダル47の上部のレバーピンを中心とした揺動に伴い、ペダル部の高さ位置の変化が生じるが、この変化は、リンクアーム68とペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61との間が揺動自在であることによって吸収される。アクチュエータハウジング78の自由な角度変化が許容されることで、ラック軸80がペダル部をストローク限界まで確実に押圧することができる。
Further, the height position of the pedal portion changes with the swing around the lever pin on the upper part of the clutch pedal 47, and this change allows the link arm 68 and the pedal actuator support bracket 61 to swing freely. It is absorbed by being. By allowing the actuator housing 78 to freely change its angle, the rack shaft 80 can reliably press the pedal portion to the stroke limit.
換言すれば、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aおよびブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bが直線運動としてアクセルペダル45やブレーキペダル46を押圧するのに対し、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cは、揺動しながらクラッチペダル47を押圧する。
In other words, the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B press the accelerator pedal 45 and the brake pedal 46 in a linear motion, whereas the clutch pedal actuator 41C presses the clutch pedal 47 while swinging.
上記実施例では、アクチュエータハウジング78がスライドブラケット69およびリンクアーム68を介してペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61に下側から支持されており、ラック軸80の延長線がペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61の上方を通過する。従って、揺動するペダル部に対する荷重作用方向が適切なものになるとともに、アクチュエータハウジング78から下方へ突出するモータハウジング81がストローク中に過度に下がらず、車体フロア6との干渉が生じにくい。
In the above embodiment, the actuator housing 78 is supported from below by the pedal actuator support bracket 61 via the slide bracket 69 and the link arm 68, and the extension line of the rack shaft 80 passes above the pedal actuator support bracket 61. .. Therefore, the direction of load acting on the swinging pedal portion becomes appropriate, and the motor housing 81 protruding downward from the actuator housing 78 does not excessively lower during the stroke, so that interference with the vehicle body floor 6 is unlikely to occur.
また同時に、ペダルアクチュエータ41を支持するスライドレール31の高さ位置を低くすることが可能となり、図2等に示すように、シートクッション3の前端付近の高さ位置にスライドレール31を配置することが可能となる。この点は、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aやブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bにおいても同様である。
At the same time, the height position of the slide rail 31 that supports the pedal actuator 41 can be lowered, and as shown in FIG. 2 and the like, the slide rail 31 is arranged at a height position near the front end of the seat cushion 3. Is possible. This point is the same in the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41B.
なお、クラッチペダル47のストロークが小さい場合やクラッチペダル47の構造等によって押圧部材86を介したペダル部の押圧が可能な場合には、3つのペダルアクチュエータ41を同じ構成とすることもできる。
If the stroke of the clutch pedal 47 is small or if the pedal portion can be pressed via the pressing member 86 due to the structure of the clutch pedal 47 or the like, the three pedal actuators 41 may have the same configuration.
逆に、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aあるいはブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41Bとして、上記実施例のクラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cのような構成を適用することも可能である。
Conversely, as the accelerator pedal actuator 41A or the brake pedal actuator 41B, it is possible to apply a configuration like the clutch pedal actuator 41C of the above embodiment.
[自動変速機型の車両への適用]
前述したように、ペダルアクチュエータ41は、フレーム11を車室内に搬入した後に、車室内においてフレーム11に取り付けることができる。例えば、クラッチペダル47を具備しない自動変速機型の車両に適用する場合には、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cを除いて、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aおよびブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41のみを取り付ければよい。 [Application to automatic transmission type vehicles]
As described above, thepedal actuator 41 can be attached to the frame 11 in the vehicle interior after the frame 11 is carried into the vehicle interior. For example, when applied to an automatic transmission type vehicle that does not have a clutch pedal 47, only the accelerator pedal actuator 41A and the brake pedal actuator 41 may be attached except for the clutch pedal actuator 41C.
前述したように、ペダルアクチュエータ41は、フレーム11を車室内に搬入した後に、車室内においてフレーム11に取り付けることができる。例えば、クラッチペダル47を具備しない自動変速機型の車両に適用する場合には、クラッチペダルアクチュエータ41Cを除いて、アクセルペダルアクチュエータ41Aおよびブレーキペダルアクチュエータ41のみを取り付ければよい。 [Application to automatic transmission type vehicles]
As described above, the
これにより、図38に示すように、自動変速機型の車両に用いられる車両自動運転装置1の態様とすることができる。
Thereby, as shown in FIG. 38, the mode of the vehicle automatic driving device 1 used for the automatic transmission type vehicle can be adopted.
前述したようにペダルアクチュエータ41の着脱は簡単に行うことができるので、シャシダイナモメータにおける被試験車両が手動変速機型の車両から自動変速機型の車両へ変更されたような場合でも、対応は容易である。
As described above, the pedal actuator 41 can be easily attached and detached, so even if the vehicle under test in the chassis dynamometer is changed from a manual transmission type vehicle to an automatic transmission type vehicle, it can be handled. It's easy.
[作用・効果]
車両自動運転装置1は、メインフレーム15の一対のメインビーム15aの前端面に取り付けられたアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31にペダルアクチュエータサポート51がスライド可能に支持されている。ペダルアクチュエータ41は、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61を介してペダルアクチュエータサポート51に支持されている。そして、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51の下面には、前方を照らすようにライトとしてのLEDライト76が備えられている。すなわち、車両自動運転装置1は、車両の運転席に搭載されるフレーム11と、フレーム11の前端部に着脱可能に取り付けられるペダルアクチュエータ41と、フレーム11の前端部に前方を照らすように設けられたLEDライト76と、を備えている。 [Action / Effect]
In the vehicleautomatic driving device 1, the pedal actuator support 51 is slidably supported by the actuator support slide rails 31 attached to the front end faces of the pair of main beams 15a of the main frame 15. The pedal actuator 41 is supported by the pedal actuator support 51 via the pedal actuator support bracket 61. An LED light 76 as a light is provided on the lower surface of the pedal actuator support 51 so as to illuminate the front surface. That is, the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is provided with a frame 11 mounted on the driver's seat of the vehicle, a pedal actuator 41 detachably attached to the front end portion of the frame 11, and a front end portion of the frame 11 so as to illuminate the front. It is equipped with an LED light 76.
車両自動運転装置1は、メインフレーム15の一対のメインビーム15aの前端面に取り付けられたアクチュエータ支持用スライドレール31にペダルアクチュエータサポート51がスライド可能に支持されている。ペダルアクチュエータ41は、ペダルアクチュエータ支持ブラケット61を介してペダルアクチュエータサポート51に支持されている。そして、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51の下面には、前方を照らすようにライトとしてのLEDライト76が備えられている。すなわち、車両自動運転装置1は、車両の運転席に搭載されるフレーム11と、フレーム11の前端部に着脱可能に取り付けられるペダルアクチュエータ41と、フレーム11の前端部に前方を照らすように設けられたLEDライト76と、を備えている。 [Action / Effect]
In the vehicle
車両自動運転装置1は、フレーム11の前端部に前方を照らすLEDライト76を有しているので、ペダルアクチュエータ41の取付作業時やペダルアクチュエータ41の位置調整作業時等の車両自動運転装置1の設置作業の作業性を向上させることができる。
Since the vehicle automatic driving device 1 has an LED light 76 that illuminates the front at the front end of the frame 11, the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is used when the pedal actuator 41 is attached or the position of the pedal actuator 41 is adjusted. The workability of the installation work can be improved.
また、LEDライト76の電源となる二次電池は、フレーム11の接続ボックス106に内蔵されている。接続ボックス106は、フレーム11を構成するサブフレーム16の接続ボックス支持部16cに埋め込まれた形に配置されている。換言すると、LEDライト76の電源となる二次電池は、フレーム11に内蔵されている。すなわち、車両自動運転装置1は、LEDライト76の電源となり、フレーム11に内蔵されて当該車両自動運転装置1が外部電源に接続されている間に充電される二次電池を備えている。
Further, the secondary battery that serves as the power source for the LED light 76 is built in the connection box 106 of the frame 11. The connection box 106 is arranged so as to be embedded in the connection box support portion 16c of the subframe 16 constituting the frame 11. In other words, the secondary battery that serves as the power source for the LED light 76 is built in the frame 11. That is, the vehicle automatic driving device 1 serves as a power source for the LED light 76, and includes a secondary battery built in the frame 11 and charged while the vehicle automatic driving device 1 is connected to an external power source.
車両自動運転装置1は、車両自動運転装置1を用いて試験運転中に特に操作を有することなく二次電池が充電されるので、外部電源に接続されていない状態でLEDライト76を点灯することが可能となる。なお、LEDライト76の電源は、例えば、リチウムキャパシタ等のキャパシタや、リチウムイオンバッテリであってもよい。
Since the secondary battery is charged in the vehicle automatic driving device 1 without any particular operation during the test operation using the vehicle automatic driving device 1, the LED light 76 should be turned on in a state where it is not connected to an external power source. Is possible. The power source of the LED light 76 may be, for example, a capacitor such as a lithium capacitor or a lithium ion battery.
車両自動運転装置1は、フレーム11の前端部の前方を照らす照明がLEDライト76なので、フレーム11の前端部の前方を照らした際に二次電池で消費される電力量を低減でき、外部電源に接続されていない状態でLEDライト76を長時間点灯させることができる。
Since the LED light 76 illuminates the front of the front end of the frame 11 in the vehicle automatic driving device 1, the amount of electric power consumed by the secondary battery when illuminating the front of the front end of the frame 11 can be reduced, and an external power source can be used. The LED light 76 can be turned on for a long time without being connected to.
車両自動運転装置1は、ペダルアクチュエータ41を複数備え、フレーム11の各ペダルアクチュエータ41が取り付けられる部分のそれぞれにLEDライト76が設けられている。換言すれば、車両自動運転装置1は、複数のLEDライト76が複数のペダルアクチュエータ41に個々に対応してフレーム11におけるペダルアクチュエータ41の取付部に配置されている。
The vehicle automatic driving device 1 is provided with a plurality of pedal actuators 41, and LED lights 76 are provided in each portion of the frame 11 to which each pedal actuator 41 is attached. In other words, in the vehicle automatic driving device 1, a plurality of LED lights 76 are arranged at the attachment portion of the pedal actuator 41 in the frame 11 corresponding to the plurality of pedal actuators 41 individually.
そのため、車両自動運転装置1は、車室内において各ペダルアクチュエータ41毎にLEDライト76でフレーム11の前端部の前方を照らすことができる。
Therefore, the vehicle automatic driving device 1 can illuminate the front of the front end portion of the frame 11 with the LED light 76 for each pedal actuator 41 in the vehicle interior.
また、LEDライト76は、より具体的には、運転席前方のペダル付近が照らされるように、ペダルアクチュエータサポート51の下面に斜め下方を指向するよう配置されている。すなわち、LEDライト76は、フレーム11の前端部の下面において、斜め下方へ向かって配置されている。
More specifically, the LED light 76 is arranged so as to point diagonally downward on the lower surface of the pedal actuator support 51 so that the vicinity of the pedal in front of the driver's seat is illuminated. That is, the LED light 76 is arranged obliquely downward on the lower surface of the front end portion of the frame 11.
車両自動運転装置1は、LEDライト76を点灯することによって最も暗い運転席前方のペダル付近(ペダルアクチュエータ41の先端部付近)を照らすことができる。そのため、車両自動運転装置1を車室内に設置する作業時の作業性(操作性)を向上させることができる。
The vehicle automatic driving device 1 can illuminate the vicinity of the darkest pedal in front of the driver's seat (near the tip of the pedal actuator 41) by turning on the LED light 76. Therefore, the workability (operability) at the time of the work of installing the vehicle automatic driving device 1 in the vehicle interior can be improved.
サブフレーム16の接続ボックス支持部16cには、接続ボックス106が埋め込まれている。また、接続ボックス106の上面の表示パネル109には、LEDライト76がオン・オフ操作されるライトスイッチ109cが配置されている。すなわち、フレーム11の前部に車両外部から車両内に引き込まれるケーブルとの接続部を構成する接続ボックス106が設けられており、この接続ボックス106の上面にLEDライト76のライトスイッチ109cが配置されている。
A connection box 106 is embedded in the connection box support portion 16c of the subframe 16. Further, a light switch 109c for turning on / off the LED light 76 is arranged on the display panel 109 on the upper surface of the connection box 106. That is, a connection box 106 is provided at the front of the frame 11 to form a connection with a cable drawn from the outside of the vehicle into the vehicle, and a light switch 109c of the LED light 76 is arranged on the upper surface of the connection box 106. ing.
車両自動運転装置1は、ライトスイッチ109cが接続ボックス106の上面に配置されているので、LEDライト76のオン・オフ操作の操作性が良好となる。
In the vehicle automatic driving device 1, since the light switch 109c is arranged on the upper surface of the connection box 106, the operability of the on / off operation of the LED light 76 is improved.
Claims (6)
- 車両の運転席に搭載されるフレームと、
上記フレームの前端部に着脱可能に取り付けられるペダルアクチュエータと、
上記フレームの前端部に前方を照らすように設けられたライトと、
上記ライトの電源であり、上記フレームに内蔵され、外部電源に接続されている間に充電される二次電池と、
を備えてなる車両自動運転装置。 The frame mounted on the driver's seat of the vehicle and
A pedal actuator that can be attached and detached to the front end of the frame,
A light provided at the front end of the frame to illuminate the front,
A secondary battery that is the power source for the light, is built into the frame, and is charged while connected to an external power source.
A vehicle automatic driving device that is equipped with. - 上記ライトがLEDライトから構成される請求項1に記載の車両自動運転装置。 The vehicle automatic driving device according to claim 1, wherein the light is composed of an LED light.
- 上記二次電池は、キャパシタである請求項1または2に記載の車両自動運転装置。 The vehicle automatic driving device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the secondary battery is a capacitor.
- 上記ペダルアクチュエータを複数備え、
上記フレームの各ペダルアクチュエータが取り付けられる部分のそれぞれに上記ライトが設けられている請求項1~3のいずれかに記載の車両自動運転装置。 Equipped with multiple pedal actuators
The vehicle automatic driving device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the light is provided in each portion of the frame to which each pedal actuator is attached. - 上記ライトは、上記フレームの前端部の下面において、斜め下方へ向かって配置されている請求項1~4のいずれかに記載の車両自動運転装置。 The vehicle automatic driving device according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the light is arranged diagonally downward on the lower surface of the front end portion of the frame.
- 上記フレームの前部に車両外部から車両内に引き込まれるケーブルとの接続部を構成する接続ボックスが設けられており、この接続ボックスの上面に上記ライトのスイッチが配置されている請求項1~5のいずれかに記載の車両自動運転装置。 Claims 1 to 5 in which a connection box constituting a connection portion with a cable drawn from the outside of the vehicle into the vehicle is provided at the front portion of the frame, and the switch of the light is arranged on the upper surface of the connection box. The vehicle automatic driving device according to any one of.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2020-049052 | 2020-03-19 | ||
JP2020049052A JP6897829B1 (en) | 2020-03-19 | 2020-03-19 | Vehicle automatic driving device |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2021187108A1 true WO2021187108A1 (en) | 2021-09-23 |
Family
ID=76650000
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2021/008157 WO2021187108A1 (en) | 2020-03-19 | 2021-03-03 | Vehicle automatic driving device |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP6897829B1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2021187108A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11440404B2 (en) * | 2019-03-25 | 2022-09-13 | Meidensha Corporation | Pedal actuator of vehicle automated driving device |
Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH0712948U (en) * | 1993-07-21 | 1995-03-03 | 株式会社堀場製作所 | Vehicle driving robot on chassis dynamometer |
JP2000346753A (en) * | 1992-05-11 | 2000-12-15 | Ono Sokki Co Ltd | Mounting and fixing device for automatic actual-vehicle driving and operating apparatus |
JP6787531B1 (en) * | 2019-03-25 | 2020-11-18 | 株式会社明電舎 | Transmission actuator mounting structure of automatic vehicle driving device |
-
2020
- 2020-03-19 JP JP2020049052A patent/JP6897829B1/en active Active
-
2021
- 2021-03-03 WO PCT/JP2021/008157 patent/WO2021187108A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2000346753A (en) * | 1992-05-11 | 2000-12-15 | Ono Sokki Co Ltd | Mounting and fixing device for automatic actual-vehicle driving and operating apparatus |
JPH0712948U (en) * | 1993-07-21 | 1995-03-03 | 株式会社堀場製作所 | Vehicle driving robot on chassis dynamometer |
JP6787531B1 (en) * | 2019-03-25 | 2020-11-18 | 株式会社明電舎 | Transmission actuator mounting structure of automatic vehicle driving device |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11440404B2 (en) * | 2019-03-25 | 2022-09-13 | Meidensha Corporation | Pedal actuator of vehicle automated driving device |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP6897829B1 (en) | 2021-07-07 |
JP2021148615A (en) | 2021-09-27 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2021187107A1 (en) | Pedal actuator for vehicle automatic driving device | |
WO2021187106A1 (en) | Automatic vehicle driving device | |
JP6787531B1 (en) | Transmission actuator mounting structure of automatic vehicle driving device | |
JP6780806B1 (en) | Support structure of automatic vehicle driving device | |
WO2020196260A1 (en) | Transmission actuator support structure for vehicle automated driving device | |
WO2020196263A1 (en) | Vehicle automated driving device | |
WO2020196261A1 (en) | Transmission actuator attachment structure of vehicle automatic driving device | |
US11453116B2 (en) | Transmission actuator support structure for vehicle automated driving device | |
US11474002B2 (en) | Vehicle automated driving device for mounting a pedal actuator | |
WO2021187108A1 (en) | Vehicle automatic driving device | |
US20080006515A1 (en) | Attachment structure | |
US11448569B2 (en) | Transmission actuator attachment structure of vehicle automatic driving device | |
JP6766979B1 (en) | Pedal actuator of automatic vehicle driving device | |
WO2022172665A1 (en) | Transmission actuator for vehicular automatic driving device | |
JP7322812B2 (en) | Transmission actuator for automatic vehicle driving system | |
JP2000344053A (en) | Vehicle steering structure | |
WO2014064858A1 (en) | Mechanical movable pedal device | |
JP2000008708A (en) | Tension mechanism in power sliding device for vehicular sliding door | |
JP3330366B2 (en) | Mounting and fixing device for automatic driving control device of actual vehicle | |
JPH05312687A (en) | Real automobile automatic drive operating apparatus and device for attaching and fixing the same |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 21772123 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 21772123 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |